Home

Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals

image

Contents

1. Architecture Interface Card Interface Drivers Series 700 EISA 25560A hshpib Series 800 CIO 27110B hpibo Series 800 HP PB 28650A B hpib1i 1 Specifying hshpib causes eisa eeprom wsio and core to be included in the kernel 2 Specifying hpibO causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 3 HP 28650A is used in Models 808 815 and 822 HP 28650B is used in other HP PB systems Neither card supports printers 4 Specifying hpib1 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Instrumentation Access to HP IB Two Series 700 EISA HP IB cards E2070A and E2071B are available for instruments Both use drivers that are packaged as part of the Standard Instrument Control Library SICL and a graphical processing environment VEE TEST See your HP Sales Representative for information on these products For Series 800 HP IB cards only you can access the entire card and all activity on the HP IB bus by including the instro driver in your kernel For example you can set medium or fast signal transmission on the HP IB bus using the instro driver Disks and tape drives require high speed signal transmission while printers and plotters require medium speed For specification of the I O controls consult the hpib 7 manpage of the HP UX Reference 2 18 Configuring Interface Cards HP IB Cabling An HP IB device can be cabled directly to its port on the back of the computer o
2. Access Mode Port Access Device File Format 0 Direct connect dev cuainstance pport 1 Dial out port dev culinstance pport 2 Dial in modem dev ttydinstance pport 1 See mksf 1M a option of asioO and muxz drivers 2 Instance number derives from ioscan f output use the card instance shown for the tty class of interface card to which the modem is being attached 3 Required for all modems Note By default mksf creates a device special file for access mode 0 appropriate for terminals To create a device file with modem syntax that is dev cua tp you need to execute mksf with the i option The i is used for only direct connect it is not necessary for dial out or dial in modem files Here is an example of creating device special files with mksf for a Series 700 whose modem is connected to hardware path 2 0 4 Note that one file 3 22 Configuring Terminals and Modems each is created for direct connect a0 dial out modem a1 and dial in modem a2 usr sbin mksf d asioO H 2 0 4 a0 i v making cuaOpO c 1 0x000000 usr sbin mksf d asioO H 2 0 4 a1 v making cul0pO c 1 0x000001 usr sbin mksf d asioO H 2 0 4 a2 v making ttydOpO c 1 0x000002 Series 800 requires yet another additional option when creating device special files for a modem you must cite the port number for the Series 800 in your mksf command In the following example the card instance
3. 1 Specifying disc2 causes hpf10 cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 2 HP FL is not supported on F10 F20 F30 807 817 and 837 business servers 3 Specifying disc4 causes disc3 hpf11 and target to be included in the kernel 2 16 Configuring Interface Cards HP FL Cables and Accessories Peripheral devices such as disks connect to the HP FL interface port via fiber optic link up to 500 meters The HP FL peripheral devices themselves are daisy chained to one another using electrical PBus cables This is shown in Figure 2 3 Fiber optic cable can be ordered from Hewlett Packard to custom length specify HFBR AWSeex where zzz is the length in increments of one meter from 001 to 500 meters HP 1005 0078 30 meter fiber optic cable with 905 type SMA connectors HP 5061 3151 PBus terminators 2 per package HP 5061 3174 PBus electrical cable Note Do not bend twist or lay objects on fiber optic cable Protect the cable from foot traffic and sharp objects Do not stress or damage the cable during or after installation Figure 2 3 HP Fiber Optic Connectivity Configuring Interface Cards 2 17 HP IB Configuration Guidelines The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus IEEE Standard 488 1980 provides connectivity for up to four peripherals on the same card including disks cartridge tape subsystems magnetic tape units plotters and printers Table 2 10 HP IB Configuration Requirements
4. usr sbin lvlnboot dev vg00 1vol2 usr sbin lvlnboot dev vg00 1vol3 usr sbin vgchange n dev vg00 usr sbin reboot 16 Identify the device files corresponding to the newly moved disk by using usr sbin ioscan fun C disk and looking for the disk s hardware path Write down the name of the new block device special file 17 Create a backup copy of the etc fstab file cp etc fstab etc fstab old 18 Edit etc fstab to include the block device special file of the disk at its new location Once edited the etc fstab file will provide accurate information to the mount command If the newly located disk is not the root disk you may now mount it If the newly located disk is the root disk it has been mounted already by other means 4 32 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives usr sbin mount a 19 If your system is an NFS server remount the file systems on its clients Do so by executing the mount command on the NFS client systems 20 Update any software application configurations that use the relocated disk drive to make sure they use the new device files Refer to your software application documentation for specific instructions 4 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 33 Removing a Disk Drive 1 Back up the data on the disk drive see the backup chapter of HP UX System Administration Tasks 2 If your system is an NFS server and file
5. For example here is a file for the disco driver Driver_Install disco 1 1 d Verify that the driver you are installing has been built into a library that can be found by the mk_kernel utility If you have been provided this driver from a third party company their engineers are likely to have compiled the driver into a library which you will have loaded into usr conf lib when you loaded their tape onto your system To examine an archive run the ar command with the t option giving the library as an argument Hopefully you will see the file such as Major and Minor Numbers C 13 disco o or whatever file name the driver is stored in among the files included in the output from the command usr ccs bin ar t usr conf lib libdisco a If you do not find the file you will need to add the driver into a library in usr conf lib Do this with the r option of the ar command For example to add disco o to usr conf lib libhp ux a execute the following usr ccs bin ar r usr conf lib libhp ux a disco o Once you have verified that the o file is present in a library accessible to mk_kernel you are ready to build your kernel to include the new driver e Make sure you returned to the stand build directory Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system f Verify that everything built
6. Configuring Interface Cards 2 21 SCSI Configuration Guidelines Small Computer System Interface SCSI is an ANSI standard for connecting computers and peripheral devices HP Series 700 and 800 computers support three implementations of SCSI 2 as shown in Table 2 12 Table 2 12 Types of SCSI and Characteristics SCSI Type SCSI Single Ended SCSI Differential SCSI Fast Wide Bus Support Series 700 Series 700 Series 700 Core I O EISA Core I O EISA Models 735 755 Series 800 Series 800 CIO HP PB HP PB 890 T500 Line Out Single line plus Two lines plus Same as Differential ground per 8 bits ground per 8 bits less susceptible to spikes faster data transmission Bus Width 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits can run 8 bits 2 22 Configuring Interface Cards Table 2 13 lists HP SCSI cards the architecture on which they are supported and the configuration requirements of the cards and attached SCSI devices Table 2 13 SCSI Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card SCSI Type Interface Driver Series 700 EISA 25525A B sct1 Differential Series 800 CIO 27147A scsi2 Single Ended Series 800 28655A scsil HP PB Single Ended Series 800 28696A scsi3 HP PB Fast Wide 1 Specifying sctl causes c700 c720 wsio core eisa and eeprom to be included in the kernel 2 Specifying scsi2 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be includ
7. 1 4 Getting Started Understanding I O Convergence As of Release 10 0 the HP UX I O system is largely converged allowing for an environment that supports a greater flexibility of bus architectural combinations This is seen most dramatically on Model K 829 systems which have capabilities previously found only on Series 700 workstations From an administrative perspective I O convergence means that the vast majority of configuration tasks are now performed identically whether for a Series 700 or Series 800 system Device file names on both architectures are consistent the naming convention is explained in the next section and drivers have been streamlined to work in this converged environment Think of the drivers as belonging to one of two broad categories according to the PA RISC bus architecture on which they run the Server I O SIO system and the Workstation I O WSIO system The SIO driver environment includes Series 800 CIO and HP PB bus architectures The WSIO driver environment supports bus architectures traditionally associated with Series 700 workstations and provides greater openness for use of third party interfaces and devices Throughout this manual the terms Series 700 and 800 continue to be used as the command uname m continues to report Series 700 or 800 model numbers Although we use the terms Series 700 and Series 800 when we describe drivers we are really implying WSIO or SIO driver environments
8. 1 ee eee ee 229 For Further Information on Interface Cards 2 2 2 32 3 Configuring Terminals and Modems Planning to Configure a Terminal or Modem 3 2 Planning to Configure a Port fora Terminal 3 2 Planning to Configure a non HP Terminal 3 3 Planning to Configure a Port fora Modem 3 3 Selecting Device Drivers for Terminals and Modems 3 4 Configuring HP UX for an HP Terminal or fora Modem 3 6 Additionally Configuring HP UX fora Terminal 3 10 Differences between Console and Terminal Configuration 3 12 Running Screen Oriented Applications on a Terminal 3 12 Configuring a Non HP Terminal as a Console J 3 13 Configuring a DEC 420 Terminal to Emulate VT100 or V1T320 Mode eaaa a l4 Using an HP 700 60 Terminal i in DEC Mode rs E N Configuring the Wyse 60 Terminal 493 18 Contents 2 Limitations to Non HP Terminal Emulation Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Modem Requirements for Modems to Work on HP UX Removing or Moving a Terminal or Modem Troubleshooting Terminal Problems Unresponsive Terminals Garbage Displayed on the Terminal Screen For Further Information on Terminals and Modems Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Planning to Configure a Disk Drive Performance Considerations for Configuring a Disk Array Considerations for Configuring a CD ROM Drive Considerations for Configuring a Floppy Di
9. Index sbin dasetup 3 32 setting primary boot path 4 31 setting switches and jumpers E ISA boards A 13 sflop 4 10 C 8 SharedPrint UX User and Administrator s Guide 7 29 7 30 shutdown 1M 3 8 shutdown_delay_mins calculating 8 8 example 8 7 shutdown grace period 8 8 shutdown_timeout_mins calculating 8 8 example 8 7 signal 5 3 31 signal termination SCSI 2 27 single user mode 3 28 sio 2 5 2 16 2 18 2 23 3 5 4 5 4 7 4 9 5 4 5 6 6 2 6 4 7 6 7 7 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 8 5 SIO drivers 2 1 sna_access 2 21 sna_LAN 2 21 sna_NODE 2 21 sna_QLLC 2 21 sna_router 2 21 sna_SDLC 2 21 sna_trace 2 21 Soft PC bits C 8 software applications 4 33 speed default for terminals and console 3 12 ssrfc 5 6 Standard Instrument Control Library SICL 2 18 stand build 1 15 2 29 3 7 4 11 4 17 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 24 C 11 Index 21 stand build system 1 15 2 29 3 7 4 17 4 20 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 25 C 11 stand build system 4 11 stand build vmunix_test 1 16 2 29 3 8 4 12 418 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 8 6 7 7 16 7 25 C 14 stand ioconfig 1 12 stand system 4 11 6 7 7 14 C 2 driver statement C 11 kernel configuration file C 15 stand vmunix 1 16 2 30 3 8 4 11 4 12 4 18 4 20 4 23 4 30 5 8 6 8 7 16 7 25 C 15 stape C 7 Starbase Graphics Techniques 7 30 station address obtaining 2 2 STK 3480 tape drive limited support 6 5
10. Once you have configured a magneto optical disk it can be used like any other disk You will find its performance somewhat slower than a hard disk but faster than a floppy disk Consult the Optical Disk Library System Administrator s Guide that accompanied the hardware for procedures on the following initializing the disk surfaces creating file systems on the optical disk devices mounting the optical disk surfaces using the optical disk library as a boot or swap device using write once disks removing the optical disk library Also refer to the section After Configuring HP UX for the Disk Device for a 5 list of potentially pertinent tasks Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 5 11 6 Configuring Tape Drives Several kinds of tape drives having different recording methods and formats can be configured to HP UX nine track reel to reel tape drive cartridge tape drive configured like a disk device QIC tape drive DDS DAT tape drive 8mm Exabyte tape drive 3480 style cartridge tape drive Despite their differences any of these tape drives can be configured into HP UX by the same basic procedure 1 Select the device drivers based on the interface HP IB or SCSI to which the tape drive is attached and include them in the kernel 2 Set the tape drive to a unique address on the interface bus 3 Follow the steps documented in this chapter to configure HP UX for the device Once you reboot th
11. Table 2 3 Distribution Panels Model Type of Compatible Complexity No Ports Form Duplex Distribution Protocols Connectors Factor Modem Panel Control 0950 2431 Direct DDP RS 232 Cl pass through 16 19in no RS 4232 RJ45 rack mount 5062 3054 Modem MDP RS 232 C added logic 8 10 25 x 4 25in yes DB25 female 5062 3070 Active ADP RS 232 Cl added logic 8 10 25 x 4 25in yes DB25 female 5062 3085 Active ADP RS 4222 added logic 8 10 25 x 4 25in yes DB25 female 5181 2085 Direct DDP RS 232 C1 pass through 8 19in no RS 4232 DB25 female rack mount 28659 60005 Modem RS 232 C added logic 6 8 5 x din yes DB25 female 1 3 pins transmit receive ground 2 4 pins transmit transmit ground receive receive ground 3 formerly ADP IT 4 Used on CIO based systems only Data Communication and Terminal Controllers DTC Data communication and terminal controllers DTCs are stand alone boxes that connect to the LAN to provide additional serial connections for local or remote devices Unlike serial interface cards which communicate directly with the core operating system DTCs use Telnet TCP IP protocols to communicate with the peripheral devices Therefore DTCs provide most but not all the same functionality Two types of DTCs are available m DTC 16TN MX telnet terminal server J2060A J2063A providing direct connection for LAN diagnostics and up to 16 serial connected peri
12. A2666A CRX 48Z subsystem Models 735 or 755 Upgrades from CRX 24Z to CRX 48Z configuration A2667A CRX 48Z subsystem Model 735 or 755 Upgrades PVRX to CRX 48Z configuration A2673A CRX 24 subsystem Model 715 or 725 EISA pgrades to CRX 24 configuration A2674A 24 bit Z Buffer and Graphics Accelerator Model 715 or 725 CRX 24Z configuration A2675A CRX 48Z subsystem Model 715 50 or 725 EISA U Upgrades a color workstation to a U pgrades to CRX 48Z configuration Z1100A VideoLive card Series 700 EISA Provides live video output A4070A HyperCRX8 Graphics Adapter Series 700 GSE bus Provides double buffered 8 bit plane graphics with 8 overlay planes color recovery A4071A HCRX24 Series 700 Provides 24 bit plane color Graphics Adapter with 8 overlay planes A4072A 3D accelerator Series 700 Accelerates HyperCRX series graphics adapters A4073A GSIC Model 715 100 Allows CRX 48Z upgrade use 2 14 Configuring Interface Cards Graphics Cable Extensions The following extensions are available for placing the CRT a distance away from the SPU 46082A B RGB extension 46080 81A HIL extension 1250 1287 Use three of these connectors to extend RGB cable for a Model 712 There is no PS 2 keyboard or mouse extension available for the Model 712 Maintaining the Accuracy of Customized Graphics Configurations Any time you modify your
13. Figure B 6 Typical I O Addressing for a MUX SCSI Multi Function Card The following excerpted terse ioscan output shows only the entries for the interfaces represented by a sample multifunction card H W Path Class Description 56 52 ext_bus HP 28655A SCSI Interface 56 53 ext_bus HP 28655A Parallel Interface 56 56 tty MUX Bus Architectures B 9 Models F G H I and 8x7 Systems All I O occurs through the HP Precision Bus HP PB on Models F G H I and 87 Figure B 7 illustrates the bus relationships in simplified form for addressing purposes Two multi function personality cards can be configured on HP PB a LAN based multi function I O card standard containing an 802 3 Thin LAN interface two serial interfaces RS 232 C console port via circular DIN connector and access port for remote console and a single ended SCSI interface m MUX based multi function I O card optional containing 8 modem or 8 modem and 8 direct connect RS 232 C ports a single ended SCSI interface and a parallel port Sample Addresses The three SCSI disks shown would have addresses of 52 6 52 5 and 52 4 A 802 3 LAN card plugged into slot 4 has LAN access through address 16 1 Figure B 7 Basic Addressing on Models F G H I and 8x7 Systems B 10 Bus Architectures Models 890 and T500 Systems Figure B 8 shows the configuration of a T500 system a large system with enormous expandability Figure B 9 shows an abbreviated version of io
14. If installing a SCSI device make sure the last device in the SCSI chain is terminated 7 Turn on the power to all peripheral devices Wait for them to become ready then turn on power to the SPU On booting up HP UX detects the new tape drive and associates it with its device driver insf creates the character device special files required to communicate with the tape drive 6 8 Configuring Tape Drives 8 Verify the configuration by invoking the ioscan command to confirm that the tape device is present and device special files have been created for it In the sample output shown the tape driver at hardware path 2 0 1 3 0 can be accessed by one of eight device files usr sbin ioscan C tape fun I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description O 2 0 1 3 0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP35480A dev rmt Om dev rmt cOt3d0BESTn dev rmt Omb dev rmt cOt3d0BEST dev rmt Omn dev rmt cOt3d0BESTb dev rmt Omnb dev rmt cOt3d0BESTnb 9 You can also use the tar command to verify that you can read and write to and from the device In the following example the first tar command writes the etc passwd file to tape using a device special file shown in the ioscan output The second tar command displays the contents of the tape usr bin tar cvf dev rmt cOt3d0BEST etc passwd a etc passwd 2 blocks usr bin tar tvf dev rmt cOt3d0BEST r r r 2 2 601 June 6 16 40 1994 etc passwd Configuring Tape Drives
15. SCSI Parity All devices on a SCSI bus must be consistent in parity checking capability If any device on the SCSI bus does not generate parity all devices on the bus including the adapter must not check parity Although parity checking is selectable the adapter always generates parity If a SCSI device cannot match the parity checking capability of other devices on the bus it must be installed on a separate SCSI bus Changing the Bus Address of a SCSI Device 1 oo e Ww N 6 Shut down and halt the system using the usr sbin shutdown h command On systems with powerfail mode be sure to also turn off the battery backup TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord Turn off the device Change the bus ID on the device Turn on the device Power on all SCSI peripherals and allow them to complete their selftest before powering on the SPU System Processor Unit Turn on your system Use of non Hewlett Packard peripherals is not supported by Hewlett Packard s standard support process 2 28 Configuring Interface Cards Configuring an Interface Card 1 Determine the interface driver needed for your interface card by consulting the tables in Selecting Device Drivers for Your Interface Cards Look at your stand system file to see if the required driver is present If you are also adding an external device such as a printer consult the tables in the appropriate chapter and look for the pr
16. hardware considerations 8 2 introduction 8 1 ioscan output 8 4 monitoring daemon 8 6 MSG_ONLY example 8 7 MSG_ONLY noncritical operation 8 9 MUX requirements 8 4 networking considerations 8 2 planning 8 2 prioritizing protected devices 8 8 real time priority 8 6 required for disk array powerfail 4 8 selecting drivers and interface 8 5 shutdown_delay_mins example 8 7 shutdown options shutdown_delay_mins 8 8 shutdown options shutdown_timeout_mins 8 8 shutdown_timeout_mins example 8 7 software considerations 8 4 troubleshooting 8 12 tty class 8 6 UPS TOOLS 8 4 upstty example 8 7 using crontab file 8 10 verifying configuration 8 11 voltage amperage VA load considerations 8 2 ups_conf 4 8 7 ups_mond 1M 8 10 documenation of UPS error messages 8 12 UPS serial connector 5061 2569 8 3 UPS TOOLS fileset 8 4 upstty example 8 7 usable devices displayed with ioscan 1 9 Using HP OpenView DTC Manager 3 1 Using the HP DTC Manager UX 3 1 usr conf lib C 2 usr conf lib libhp ux a C 2 C 14 usr conf master d C 2 C 3 usr include sys mtio h C 7 usr lbin sysadm system_prep 7 16 usr 1bin ups_mond 8 6 usr sbin sam 3 2 3 3 3 12 411 5 7 6 7 8 6 MSG_ONLY noncritical operation 8 9 printers and plotters 7 1 uucp 1 3 2 UUCP for modem 3 3 V verifying tape drive configuration 6 9 vgchange 1M 4 22 4 25 4 32 Index vgexport 1M 4 22 vgimport 1M
17. 1 on a system requiring short file names Configuring Tape Drives 6 11 To create device special files for the HP35480A to write a tape in uncompressed form use the following sample command Also shown are the resulting device special files usr sbin mksf I 8 C tape b DDS1 dev rmt c t d DDS1 on a system allowing long file names or dev rmt c t d f1 on a system requiring short file names This tape can now be read on a tape drive regardless of whether or not it supports data compression 6 12 Configuring Tape Drives After Configuring a Tape Drive The following manpages found in the HP UX Reference give specifications related to typical tape drive tasks and capabilities cpio 1 dd 1 ftio 1 mediainit 1 mt 1 nohup 1 pax 1 tar 1 tcio 1 backup 1M cstm 1M dump 1M foackup 1M frecover 1M install 1M toscan 1M lssf 1M mk_kernel 1M mkrs 1M mksf 1M restore 1M rmt 1M savecore 1M scsictl 1M swinstall 1M tar A4 ct 7 mt 7 scsi 7 scsi_ctl 7 scsi_tape 7 Copy file archives in and out cpio is not recommended for use with 3480 products Convert reblock translate and copy a file Faster tape I O Initialize disk or cartridge tape media partition DDS Magnetic tape manipulating program Run a command immune to hangups logouts and quits Portable archive exchange tape file archiver Command set 80 CS 80 cartridge tape utility Backup or archive file system
18. 11 dev ttyOp1 crw rw rw 1 bin i 178 0x000100 Mar 16 18 29 dev tty0p1 o If you are configuring a terminal without having to install an interface card you can physically connect the terminal as described in its owner s manual Then skip ahead to Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Terminal the next section o If you are configuring a modem to an existing port note the hardware address or card instance number and port number you will be using from the ioscan output Then skip ahead to Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Modem later in this chapter If the necessary driver is not present in the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include the additional driver This might occur if you have to add hardware to configure additional terminals or if you are running a minimal kernel 3 To rebuild your kernel and include an additional driver here is what to do a Identify the needed driver by consulting the table in Selecting Device b Drivers for Terminals and Modems earlier in this chapter Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel and writes a system file in your current directory That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 7 cd stand build usr lbin sysadm
19. 7 12 7 13 28696A 2 23 36960A 2 20 Index 12 36967A 2 20 40299B 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 8 5 98190A 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 98196A 3 5 7 9 7 10 A1703 60003 2 5 3 5 8 5 A1703 60022 2 5 3 5 3 13 8 5 A1749A ChannelSpan 2 16 A2544A 2 20 Apollo TokenRing 2 20 E2070A 2 18 E2071B 2 18 FDDI 9000 2 21 HIPPI Link 2 20 HP 25525B 4 9 HP 25560A 6 4 HP 27110B 4 5 6 2 6 4 HP 27111A 4 7 HP 27113B 4 5 HP 27147A 4 9 5 4 5 6 HP 28615A 4 7 HP 28650B 4 5 6 2 6 4 HP 28655A 4 9 5 4 5 6 ISDN Link 2 20 J2069A 2 20 J2092A 2 5 8 5 J2093A 2 5 8 5 J2094A 2 5 8 5 J2096A 2 5 8 5 J2092 7 9 7 10 J2092A 3 5 J2104A 2 20 J2109A 2 20 J2146A 2 21 J2156A 2 21 J2157A 2 21 J2159A 2 21 J2165A 2 21 J2166A 2 21 J2220A 2 21 J2226A 2 21 LAN 9000 2 20 LANLink 2 20 2 21 maximum configurations 2 4 networking 2 20 planning to configure 2 2 selecting drivers 2 5 SNAplus Link 2 21 TokenRing 9000 2 21 X 25 9000 2 21 X 25Link 2 20 interface driver C 2 interface drivers selecting for interface card 2 5 I O hierarchy 1 10 iointt 1M 1 12 ioscan 1M 1 9 3 2 3 6 3 8 41 4 11 6 7 7 14 and kernel structures 1 9 comparing hardware path and device file 4 21 full listing 1 13 identifying usable devices 1 9 manually associating driver and peripheral C 15 terse listing 1 9 using to determine available addresses 1 9 ISA boards A 1 A 2 configuration g
20. Command line interface to the Support Tool Manager Incremental file system dump local or across network Selectively back up files Selectively recover files Install commands 6 Scan I O system List a special file Build a bootable HP UX kernel Construct a recovery system Make a special file Restore file system incrementally local or across network Remote magnetic tape protocol module Save a core dump of the operating system Control a SCSI device Install HP UX software Format of tar tape archive Command set 80 C5 80 cartridge tape access Magnetic tape interface and controls Small Computer System Interface device drivers SCSI device control device driver SCSI sequential access stape device driver Configuring Tape Drives 6 13 Other sources you may wish to consult include HP UX System Administration Tasks Managing HP UX Software HP OpenView Software Distributor Administrator s Guide HP OmniBack Turbo Store documentation Documentation for any products you intend to install from tape media 6 14 Configuring Tape Drives Configuring Printers and Plotters Because they are output only devices printers and plotters are configured somewhat differently than other peripheral devices There are three basic steps to printer and plotter configuration a physically installing the printer or plotter documented in the hardware manual shipped with the device m configuring the HP UX kernel for the device dri
21. No EEPROM Data gt EISA Card ID eisa_id Cause An EISA card identified itself but non volatile memory NVM has no configuration data for the slot Action Run eisa_config to update NVM Message Cannot read EISA card ID Cause NVM recognizes that the card exists but cannot read its ID Action If a card is present there is a hardware problem Replace the card If a card is not present ignore the message Message Board ID eisa_id inconsistent with NVM ID ezsa_id Cause The ID read from the card does not match the card ID information stored in NVM Action If board has been moved run eisa_config in automatic mode If this message persists after running eisa_config and updating NVM replace the board If board has been removed ignore the message Message Bad eeprom data for board eisa_id Cause An attempt to read the NVM configuration information failed This represents a system problem Action Call your HP representative Message Error initializing board etsa_id Cause An attempt to initialize the card with the stored NVM initialization data failed Action Check CFG file for inaccuracies Suspect a hardware problem EISA Board Configuration A 21 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Messages Causes Action EISA Board ID eisa_td ignored Board not present or driver not configured into kernel The ID displayed was
22. These separate environments permit only those drivers required by a given bus architecture to be configured into the kernel as needed for example only WSIO drivers on a legacy Series 700 system or SIO d WSIO drivers on a Series 800 system Read the usr conf master d core hpux file to better understand the architectural context dependencies Also consult master 4 in the HP UX Reference Getting Started 1 5 Understanding Device Special File Names Device special files tell the operating system which device driver to use how to find the peripheral device and what characteristics the peripheral device should employ Characteristics vary by device Thus device special files for magneto optical devices show the surface being addressed while those for tape drives show rewind and density Most device special file names contain the location of the device on the bus architecture To see this display the files in any subdirectory of the dev directory Note all mass storage devices adhere to a syntax that includes c t d s other kinds of device files use a related convention c t d s 1 1 oa represents the card instance number for the class of interface card to which the device is connected Classes of interface cards include ext_bus graphics tty lan and others The card instance of an interface card is unique for its specific class There is no relationship between the instance number and the slot number o
23. and major numbers C 3 associating custom driver with a peripheral C 11 bit assignments C 7 dev_t format C 4 for HP FL disk 4 7 for HP IB disk drives 4 5 for HP IB plotters 7 7 for HP IB printers 7 6 for HP IB tape drives 6 2 for parallel centronics plotters 7 12 for parallel centronics printers 7 11 for printers and plotters 7 5 for SCSI disk 4 9 for SCSI printers 7 13 for SCSI tape drives 6 5 for serial RS 232 C plotters 7 10 for serial RS 232 C printers 7 9 for terminals and modems 3 4 3 5 instro 2 18 kernel association C 2 location C 2 major number C 3 device installation requirements 1 2 device number defined 1 6 device special files and hardware path 1 13 Index associated with a peripheral device 1 14 bit assignments C 4 correlating with hardware components 1 9 creating customized for tape drives 6 10 creating for modems 3 22 creating for serial printer or plotter 7 18 creation 4 14 disk drives 4 5 4 7 4 9 exhaustive mode for tape drives 6 11 floppy disk drives 4 10 for printers and plotters 7 18 for tape drives 6 8 instruments 7 7 magneto optical disk drives 5 4 magneto optical disk libraries 5 6 major and minor numbers C 2 plotters 7 7 7 10 7 12 printers 7 6 7 9 7 11 7 18 tape drives 6 2 6 4 6 5 dev mux 3 5 dev o crt 2 13 dev_t format C 4 dev ttyd p 3 22 dev tty p 3 5 3 6 diagnostic bit C 8 disci 4 5 6 4 C 8 disc2 2 16
24. fn to confirm that the I O subsystem finds the terminal Your output should now resemble the ioscan output 3 shown in step 2 Proceed to Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Terminal or Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Modem later in this chapter depending on which device you are configuring Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 9 Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Terminal The previous procedure ensured the system side was set up properly now you are setting up the terminal side m If the terminal will be used as a console the default configuration is likely to be correct a If the terminal will not be used as a console but rather as an additional serial terminal you might have to set configuration modes 1 From the new terminal use the function keys to set the terminal s features In most cases default settings will be sufficient Note Newer terminals have default modes correct for communicating with HP UX If you are uncertain the terminal is configured in default mode a Power off the terminal b Hold D key down while powering on The terminal will power on with correct default modes Make any adjustments that might be necessary 2 Add a getty entry for each new terminal in etc inittab Entries must conform to the pattern id run_state action process as documented on the inittab 4 manpage A sample terminal entry resembles the following ttp3 2 respawn usr sbin getty h
25. hardware flow control CTS RTS minor number bit C 8 hardware path 1 10 associating with driver C 15 hard wired terminals in etc gettydefs 3 12 hexadecimal equivalents to binary and decimal C 5 hexadecimal notation C 4 hierarchy of I O 1 10 hippi 2 20 HP 700 60 configured in non HP console modes 3 13 HP FL 28615A adapter 2 16 accessories 2 17 cables 2 17 device bits C 8 disk device drivers 4 7 installation guidelines 2 16 limitations 4 7 unit bits C 8 hpf10 2 16 4 7 hpf11 2 16 4 7 HP IB address bits C 8 addressing range 6 2 and parallel polling 6 2 cable length 2 19 cabling 2 19 changing address switch settings 2 19 configuration guidelines 2 18 device bits C 8 disk device drivers 4 5 disk limitations 4 5 instrumentation access 2 18 interface limitations 4 2 tape device drivers 6 2 hpib 7 6 7 7 hpibo 2 18 4 5 6 2 6 4 7 6 7 7 hpib1 2 18 4 5 6 2 6 4 hpib 7 2 18 HP IB device bits C 7 Index HP IB unit bits C 7 HP JetDirect Network Interface 7 3 HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide 7 29 HP MPower 1 2 Installation and Configuration 7 29 HP PB 28615A HP FL adapter 2 16 A1749A ChannelSpan card 2 16 backplane slot priority 2 3 F W SCSI disk drives 4 9 no HP IB printers 7 6 SCSI tape drives 6 5 Series 800 HP FL disk drives 4 7 Series 800 HP IB disk drives 4 5 Series 800 HP IB tape drivers 6 2 Series 800 magneto optical disk drives 5 4 S
26. pfail and pa drivers to be included in the kernel 5 4 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices Configuring HP UX for a Magneto Optical Disk This section gives instructions on configuring HP UX for a single magneto optical disk Configuring a single magneto optical disk is done almost identically to configuring any hard disk to a single ended SCSI interface card 1 Select the device drivers from the table Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Guidelines in the previous section 2 Follow the procedure Configuring HP UX for a New Disk Device in Chapter 4 Configuring Disk Devices Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 3 Unless you have purchased the disk preformatted you may need to run mediainit to initialize the media Refer to the hardware documentation or mediainit 1 in the HP UX Reference If you are configuring an magneto optical disk library refer to the next section Magneto Optical Disk Library Configuration Guidelines Caution If you are configuring an existing 9 2 magneto optical disk to an HP UX 10 0 system be sure to read and follow the precautions detailed in the sections entitled Planning to Configure into your System a Disk Already Containing Data and Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 both located in Chapter 4 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives of this manual Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 5 5 Magneto Optical Disk Library Configur
27. pv m mapfile dev vg06 block_device_special_file vgimport v m mapfile dev vg06 block_device_special_file The vgimport command adds the volume group name to the etc lvmtab file It also adds the device special files associated with the volume group s logical volumes to the system Activate the new volume group usr sbin vgchange a y dev vg06 Mount the logical volumes to their new mount point For further information on mounting and unmounting consult the HP UX System Administration Tasks manual mkdir new_location mount dev vg06 lvoli new_location Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 25 Moving a Disk Drive to a Different Address Occasionally you might find yourself having to move a disk from one interface card to another This procedure explains how to do so Note Moving the root disk and moving an LVM root disk are special cases You will find additional instructions at several points in this procedure to cover these requirements To move a disk drive using HP UX commands 1 Back up the files on the disk drive to be moved see the backup chapter in HP UX System Administration Tasks 2 If you are moving a root LVM disk execute the lvlnboot v command to view the current configuration Record the information For example asr sbin lvlnboot v Boot Definitions for Volume Group dev vg00 Physical Volumes belonging in Root Volume Group d
28. 1 slp 1 accept reject 1M bootpd 1M eisa_config 1M insf 1M toscan 1M lpadmin 1M lpana 1M lpsched lpshut 1M mk_kernel 1M rcancel 1M rlp 1M rlpdaemon 1M ripstat 1M shutdown 1M tsm lpadmin 1M 29printd 1M dp A pef 4 cent ddfa Ip 7 7 7 Enable or disable LP printers Send cancel or alter LP requests Print LP status information Print files Set printing options for non serial printer Allow or prevent LP requests Internet boot protocol server EISA configuration tool Install special files Scan I O system Configure the LP spooling system Print LP spooler performance analysis information Start or stop LP request scheduler Build a bootable HP UX kernel Remove requests from LP queue 7 Send requests to a remote system Remote spooling LP daemon Print status of remote LP spooler requests Terminate all processing Manage printers using Terminal Session Manager Remote PAD printer server for LP requests Dedicated ports file used by DDFA and DTC Port configuration file used by DDFA software Parallel centronics interface DTC device file access software Line printer Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 29 For Further Information on Plotter Related Tasks m Starbase Graphics Techniques a SharedPrint UX User and Administrator s Guide a Managing SwitchOver UX m In addition to the manpages listed in the previous section the following manpages may be helpful Ipf
29. 13 A2269A 2 13 A2270A 2 13 A22714A 2 13 A2272A 2 13 A2666A 2 13 A2667A 2 13 A2673A 2 13 A2674A 2 13 A2675A 2 13 A4070A 2 13 A4071A 2 13 A4072A 2 13 A4073A 2 13 Z11004 2 13 graphics configurations maintaining accuracy of 2 15 graphics devices configuration information 2 14 installing 2 14 group volume group file 4 24 guidelines centronics parallel interface 2 11 configuring a disk with existing data 4 14 configuring a non HP printer to a parallel port 7 23 device drivers for terminals and modems 3 4 Index 10 EISA configuration 2 12 floppy disk configuration 4 10 for UPS shutdown settings 8 8 graphics card configuration 2 13 HP IB printer and plotter configuration 7 5 HP IB tape drive configuration 6 2 magneto optical disk configuration 5 4 magneto optical disk library configuration 5 6 networking configuration 2 20 parallel printer and plotter configuration 7 11 SCSI disk configuration 4 8 SCSI printer and plotter configuration 7 13 SCSI tape drive configuration 6 5 serial printer and plotter configuration 7 8 H handshake bits C 8 handshake modes for parallel interface 7 23 hardware terminals 3 31 hardware addresses C 2 decoding 1 10 defined 1 10 determining 1 15 field separators 1 10 general 1 15 Models F G I I 8x7 B 11 on multi function cards B 8 hardware considerations for UPS 8 2 hardware flow control CTS RTS 3 5 for modems 3 26
30. 18 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Configuring into Your System a Partitioned Disk Already Containing Data Note This procedure is provided for configuring a Series 800 legacy hard partitioned disk into HP UX 10 0 Before proceeding make sure you have read Planning to Configure into your System a Disk Already Containing Data and have performed the examination documented in Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 4 1 Before you move a disk from one system to another you must create a clear record of how the disk is set up on its original system Make a record of the following output a bdf for information on what file systems are mounted m etc fstab for information about the file systems mounted on the disk at boot time If the disk is being moved from a 9 x system the equivalent file will have been called etc checklist If the disk being moved is partitioned etc checklist will be your only source of information for what partitions sections are being used swapinfo for information on device and file system swap space enabled on the disk m If the disk is used for a database make a record of the database configuration file 2 Back up the data on the disk see the backup chapter in HP UX System Administration Tasks 3 Create a record of your system s current disk configuration for later comparison usr sbin ioscan fun C disk 4 Note whether the current c
31. 2 5 HP 700 60 configured in non HP modes 3 13 planning to configure 3 2 VT100 compatible 3 13 VT320 3 13 Wyse 60 3 13 console remote 2 5 consoles 3 11 core 2 18 2 23 6 4 7 6 7 7 core hpux C 3 correcting an error while using eisa_config A 8 correlating components and device special files 1 9 cpd 4 14 creating an LVM mapfile 4 22 Index 4 creating new sci files A 13 cron 1M 8 10 crontab file and UPS 8 10 cs80 6 4 7 6 7 7 CS80 unit bits C 8 ct 7 6 4 CTS RTS hardware flow control for modems 3 26 cue 1 3 20 cuegetty 1M 3 20 custom device drivers C 11 custom drivers 2 1 customized graphics configurations maintaining accuracy of 2 15 D daemons syslogd 8 10 system logging 8 6 ups_mond 8 10 UPS monitoring 8 6 data bits terminal vs console 3 12 data communication and terminal controllers DTC 2 8 16TN MX 2 8 72MX 2 8 J2060A J2063A 2 8 J2070A 2 8 data compression avoiding its use on tape drives 6 11 dealing with 6 1 6 5 6 11 decimal binary and hexadecimal equivalents C 5 DEC terminals 3 3 DEC VT terminals 3 14 16 emulation limitations 3 20 DELT 2326 C2 8 5 DELT 2336 C2 8 5 determining available addresses using ioscan 1 9 dev cua p 3 22 dev cul p 3 22 device adapter installing 2 1 device configuration using SAM 1 3 device drivers C 2 28615A HP FL adapter 2 17 addressing C 2 and disk drives 4 5 and magneto optical devices 5 2
32. 22 configuring UPS to cycle power during non work hours 8 10 force configuration of device drivers C 11 manually associating driver and peripheral C 15 moving disk drive to a different address 4 26 removing a disk drive 4 34 processes associated w terminals 3 29 terminating 3 30 ps 1 3 29 ps2 C 11 autosearch bits C 11 psio 2 21 psii 2 21 ptyo C 11 ptyi C 11 Q QIC tape drives 6 10 R RAID independent mode B 11 RAID levels 4 3 raw mode bit C 8 Index real time priority and UPS 8 6 reboot 1M 3 8 rebuilding the kernel to add drivers 6 7 recommendation backing up existing data 4 17 redirecting log messages 8 10 reference manuals 1 1 regenerating kernel stand vmunix C 15 remote console connectivity for 2 5 remove command eisa_config A 15 removing boards A 15 removing peripherals disk drive 4 34 terminal or modem 3 27 root disk special considerations 4 26 4 28 root privileges 1 1 RS 232 C 3 5 3 6 cabling 2 9 configuration requirements for plotters 7 10 configuration requirements for printers 7 9 interface cards 2 5 total cable length for UPS 8 3 RS 422 availability for plotter configuration 7 10 RS 422 423 2 5 rtprio 8 6 run level 3 28 S s0 4 21 s2 4 21 sam 1M 6 7 sample addresses B 3 B 4 B 10 B 11 sbin dasetup 3 32 sbin lib eisa directory A 2 Index 19 sbin rc 8 7 schgr 5 6 C 8 in sample ioscan output 5 9 sci files creating
33. 3 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 1 7 8 1 8 2 B 1 C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 Magneto Optical Disk Library Configuration Requirements HP IB Tape Drive Configuration Requirements HP IB Cartridge Tape Drive Configuration Requirements SCSI Tape Drive Configuration Requirements HP IB Printer Configuration Requirements HP IB Plotter Configuration Requirements Serial Printer Configuration Requirements Serial Plotter Configuration Requirements Parallel Printer Configuration Requirements Parallel Plotter Configuration Requirements SCSI Printer Configuration Requirements UPS Cable Pin Outs Loe UPS Configuration Requirements Hardware Addresses of Multi Function 1 0 Cards Decimal Binary and Hexadecimal Equivalents Bit Assignments for Tape Devices Bit Assignments for Disk and Magneto Optical Devices Bit Assignments for Serial Network and Line Printer Devices Bit Assignments for Miscellaneous Devices Contents 10 5 6 6 3 6 4 6 6 7 6 1 7 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 8 4 8 5 B 8 C 5 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 Getting Started Before physically installing a disk drive tape drive printer or other peripheral device you must configure the HP UX operating system to communicate with it Configuring HP UX for Peripherals provides the software information needed for system administrators to configure the many peripheral devices supported on HP UX Read this chapter for an over
34. 3 6 7 9 7 10 7 18 C 8 associating driver and peripheral manually C 15 asynchronous data communication 2 5 attached line printer bit C 8 AT amp T style tape positioning 6 2 AT amp T V4 file system layout 4 15 audio C 11 AUI LAN 2 20 autoch class in sample ioscan output 5 9 AUTO file 4 28 auto form feed bit C 8 automatic mode A 1 autox0 5 6 C 8 Index 1 backplane slot priority 2 3 backward compatibility configuring disks with hard partitions 4 16 configuring LVM disks 4 16 configuring SDS disks 4 16 configuring whole disks 4 16 disktab 4 4 21 etc checklist 4 19 etc disktab 4 1 magneto optical disks 5 5 s2 421 section numbers 4 6 4 7 4 9 Series 700 SDS disks 4 14 Series 700 whole disks 4 14 Series 800 hard partitions 4 14 baud rate for modem 3 3 baud rate mismatch 3 32 baud switching 3 26 bdevsw C 3 bdf 1 4 19 Bell CCITT C 8 Berkeley style tape positioning 6 2 bit assignments C 7 disk drivers C 8 line printer devices C 8 magneto optical devices C 8 miscellaneous devices C 11 network devices C 8 serial devices C 8 tape drivers C 7 black boxes C 1 block I O C 2 block major number C 3 book overview 1 1 references 1 1 boot administration boot ROM menus 430 LVM maintenance mode 4 31 3 Index 2 mode 4 30 booting in LVM maintenance mode 4 31 BREAK signal used for INTR and baud switching 3 26 BSD behavior bit C 7 build environment 1 15 2 29 3 7
35. 4 parallel polling 6 2 planning to configure 6 2 STK 3480 6 5 STK 4220 6 5 STK 4280 6 5 tape positioning 6 2 tasks 6 13 types 6 1 working with different formats 6 10 tape positioning 6 2 tar 1 6 9 target 2 16 4 7 49 5 4 7 13 target address defined 1 6 tasks configuring a DEC420 to emulate VT100 mode 3 14 16 configuring a non HP terminal as a console 3 13 configuring a port for a modem connection 3 6 configuring a port for a terminal connection 3 6 configuring a Wyse 60 terminal as HP console 3 18 19 configuring PowerTrust UPS 8 6 configuring printers 7 14 configuring UPS to cycle power during non work hours 8 10 Index force configuration of device drivers C 11 instr0 devices 7 24 maintaining accuracy of customized graphics configurations 2 15 moving a printer or plotter 7 27 plotters 7 24 tape drives 6 13 terminals 3 6 telnet 7 8 terminal configuration 3 30 terminal resetting 3 30 terminals 3 32 as consoles 3 2 3 7 3 11 compared to console 3 12 configuring 3 6 configuring a DEC420 to emulate VT100 mode 3 14 16 configuring a non HP 3 13 configuring Wyse 60 as HP console 3 18 19 data bits 3 12 DEC VT terminals 3 14 16 default speed 3 12 device files 3 30 differences between console and terminal configuration 3 12 ensuring correct configuration for hard wired 3 12 hard wired vs accessed by modem 3 12 limitations to non HP terminal emulation 3 20 moving u
36. 4 25 vgscan 1M 4 24 volume group management 4 22 4 25 4 27 VT100 3 5 VT100 mode 3 16 VT320 3 5 Ww white papers HP UX 10 0 Device File Naming Convention 1 12 HP UX 10 0 File System Layout 4 15 whole disk designation 4 21 work sheets disk drives D 4 interface cards D 2 printers and plotters D 7 tape drives D 6 terminals and modems D 3 uninterruptible power systems UPS D 8 writing tape data in uncompressed form 6 11 wsio 2 5 2 18 2 23 5 4 5 6 6 4 7 6 7 7 WYSE60 3 5 Wyse 60 default configuration values 3 18 Wyse 60 terminal as HP console 3 18 19 emulation limitations 3 20 Wyse terminals 3 3 xX x25ip 2 20 2 21 x25pa 2 20 2 21 Index 25
37. 4 of Appendix C shows the the bit assignments for the CentIf driver Bits 28 31 encode the handshake mode as follows Handshake using nACK and BUSY lines Handshake using BUSY line only Bidirectional read write for ScanJet support Streaming mode Setup 1 usec hold 1 usec This mode is commonly used by Tektronix Phasor and others printers Pulsed mode Similar to mode 1 but nSTROBE is 1 usec Pulsed mode Similar to mode 2 but nSTROBE is 1 usec Modes 5 and 6 are used to resolve deadlock situations that may occur in modes 1 and 2 Products that work well with modes 5 and 6 are the HP 2932 family of printers and some printers from NEC and Qume Note these modes are for reference use only No support beyond mode 2 for HP LaserJets is implied however the user may test these modes for possible success with other vendor devices For more information on the Centronics interface consult the cent 7 manpage Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 23 Configuring a Plotter or other Non Automatically Configurable Output Devices Using HP UX Commands Note Although this procedure refers explicitly to plotters it can be used to configure other devices that need the instr0O device driver on a Series 800 computer Unlike printers plotters cannot be automatically configured by the kernel Instead you must manually ensure that the driver is associated with the hardware path by using the capabilities of ioscan 1 Conne
38. 5 moving boards A 14 removing boards A 15 saving configuration A 13 troubleshooting A 18 Index 7 Index eisa_config 1M 7 14 EISA device swapping to 2 12 etc checklist 4 19 etc eisa config log file A 13 etc exports 4 26 etc fstab 4 19 4 32 etc gettydefs 3 33 etc inittab 3 31 7 8 etc ioconfig 1 12 etc lp interface 7 27 etc lvmtab 4 22 4 25 etc syslog conf redirecting log messages 8 10 etc ups_conf 8 6 Ethernet bit C 8 EtherTwist 2 20 examples calculating SCSI cable length 2 26 checking syntax of EISA CFG file A 18 configuration of a UPS 8 2 configuring UPS to cycle power during non work hours 8 10 correlating card instance and device files 1 13 creating device special files for modem 3 23 determining available addresses using ioscan 1 9 diskinfo output for disks 4 37 diskinfo output for magneto optical disk 5 3 displaying EISA board information A 9 editing etc uucp Devices for modem 3 25 entries in etc ttytype 3 11 etc syslog conf entry for redirecting UPS log messages 8 10 Index 8 etc ups_conf file for a UPS 8 7 force configuration of device drivers C 11 getty entry for a UPS port 8 7 getty entry in etc inittab for modem 3 24 identifying device special files with a tape device 1 14 interacting with the ISL 4 30 ioscan fn output showing tape device special files 1 14 ioscan output for a Model 725 B 5 ioscan output for a Series 800 mul
39. 6 9 Creating Customized Device Special Files for Tape Devices The default device special files created by insf handle most routine tape drive requirements For special circumstances however you can use SAM or the tape driver options of the mksf command to create device special files For complete syntax information consult the SAM online help or mksf 1M manpage in the HP UX Reference Examples In each example the tape device is at card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the tape device is attached as shown by usr sbin ioscan fn output Reading a Tape on a Different Format Device Typically a tape written on a Wangtek QIC 1000 device cannot be read on a Wangtek QIC 525 device This is because the default device special file dev rmt c t d BEST will write in QIC 1000 format To create the device file needed for writing QIC 525 format use the following command Also shown are the resulting device special files usr sbin mksf C tape I 1 b QIC_525 dev rmt c t d QIC525 on a system allowing long file names or dev rmt c t d 5 on a system requiring short file names Note In short file name notation f or i shown in next example denotes device dependent values See mt 7 in the HP UX Reference for explanation Note QIC tape drives are SCSI devices and are based on a different technology than older HP IB cartridge drives The media used by the two types of tape drives are i
40. F19 second unlabeled key to right of Pause Break m Many applications use Tab for forward navigation and Shift ab for backward navigation when moving from one field to another Users having DEC terminals or using terminals in DEC emulation modes will find that these two actions are indistinguishable Therefore you must navigate in a circular fashion to return to a desired field that is Tab forward through the menus a DEC terminals do not support softkey menus thus no such menus are displayed on these terminals Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 21 Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Modem 1 If you are configuring a modem to the single modem port on a Series 800 multi function card you need to ensure that the modem port is not locked a Execute a control B on the console to get into command mode This will give you a CM gt prompt b Execute a ur command to unlock the remote access port c Execute a dr command to disable the remote access port d Execute a co command to return to the console mode 2 Execute the ioscan C tty fn command to identify again the card instance hardware path and port number for the modem port 3 Create device special files for the modem based on the card instance or hardware path and port number You can use SAM to create the device special files recommended or use mksf Modem device files have the following format Table 3 7 Device Special Files for Modems
41. GGG IG IG kak kak ak ak ak ak atk ack a ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak disco sdisk sflop stape ii Add a driver statement at the end of the file if you intend to force load the driver at only a certain hardware path The driver statement tells HP UX to associate the driver at a specified hardware address and has the following format driver lt hardware_path gt lt driver_name gt For example a driver statement to associate a custom driver named disco with an interface card at address 2 0 7 6 0 on a Model 755 resembles this driver 2 0 7 6 0 disco C 12 Major and Minor Numbers Note although an HP UX disk device driver such as sdisk may be present in the kernel this driver statement instructs HP UX to use disco for the disk at address 2 0 7 6 0 only HP UX continues to use its standard disk device drivers for any other disks If disco should replace all instances of sdisk in the kernel you could simply remove sdisk from the system file and replace it with disco You only need to add a driver statement if you want to force configure the driver to a specific path s c Create a small file in the usr conf master d directory to be cross referenced by the stand system file entry when the kernel is rebuilt The file can be given any name but should have the following format which resembles that of the Driver_Install portion of usr conf master d core hpux Driver_Install lt driver_name gt 1 1
42. If you have moved a board you may also need to make new device files 2 Ensure that all appropriate software I O drivers are present in the kernel 3 Shut down the system with the usr sbin shutdown h command 4 Once the system is shut down turn the power off Then set any physical switches and jumpers correctly The switches and jumpers that have changed since eisa_config was invoked are listed below The file var adm eisa config log contains a summary of the new configuration including required switch and jumper settings 5 Physically add move or remove boards as needed 6 Turn the power on and boot the system EISA Board Configuration A 11 Displaying Switch and Jumper Settings Once you exit eisa_config displays the switch and jumper settings that have changed since the program was invoked For example Slot 2 XYZ Networking Board Switch Mame I O Base Address Switches 1 through 3 select the I O Base Address switch 4 is not applicable NOTE off in the diagram below corresponds to OPEN on board switches Default setting 1 0 O O 1 Required setting 1 0 O O 1 x x on IO lI E EI x x off 1 2 3 4 Slot 2 XYZ Networking Board Switch Name Loopback Mode Default Required on off o 0 x 4 o 0 x 3 o 0 x 2 o 0 x 1 Exiting eisa_config A 12 EISA Board Configuration Saving the Configuration and Ex
43. NVM and etc eisa system sci of the new system Complete the configuration task by exiting eisa_config making any necessary physical changes to the boards and rebooting the system EISA Board Configuration A 17 Troubleshooting E ISA Board Configuration Begin by reading the system messages displayed by the dmesg command Then consult this section and E ISA Board Power Up Messages shortly for possible causes and recommended actions Verifying the Syntax of a CFG File If an E ISA board is not configuring properly check the CFG file syntax using the c option Note the eisa_config c option is useful only for diagnosing errors in a particular CFG file not for changing the configuration eisa_config c HWPCOS1 Checking this CFG File for correctness sbin lib eisa HWPCO51 CFG Successful syntax verification Board Stops Working or No Non Volatile Memory NVM Driver If a board that was working suddenly stops working or the system reports that the NVM driver cannot be used the kernel might have been altered and now lacks the required device drivers If so you will need to relink the E ISA board drivers to the kernel See Configuring the Software Required by the E ISA Board or board documentation supplied by the manufacturer A 18 EISA Board Configuration Added or Moved Board Does Not Work If you added or moved an E ISA board that is not working check the following 1 If you added th
44. Printer Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device Files Series 800 CIO 27147 60002 scsi2 dev c t d _1p lpr3 Series 800 HP PB 28655A1 scsi same as above lpr3 1 The following printer models can be configured to the Series 800 SCSI interface C2001A C2106A C2114A C2753A C2754A C2755A C2756A C2772A C2773A C2776A C2777A 2 Specifying scsi2 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 3 Specifying lpr3 causes target sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 4 c t d derives from the hardware path as shown in ioscan output c is the card instance of the ext_bus class of interface card to which the printer is attached t is the SCSI ID number d is the device number 5 Specifying scsil causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Note There is no SCSI printer driver for Series 700 Also SAM does not support SCSI printers Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 13 Configuring a Printer Using HP UX Commands First configure the software for the operating system Then if necessary bring down the system to install hardware When you reboot HP UX will automatically bind the drivers to the peripherals it finds 1 Consult the tables in Selecting Device Drivers for Your Printer or Plotter to identify which drivers need to be present in your kernel for HP UX to communicate through
45. be included automatically in the kernel 3 The following disk devices can be configured to a Series 700 Fast Narrow Differential EISA SCSLII C2425JK C2427JK C2435A C2436HA HZ C2437HA HZ C2438A C2439HA HZ JA JZ C2440HA HZ JA IZ C2474J C2481A C2482A C2491A C2492A 4 The following disk devices can be configured to a Series 700 Fast Wide Differential SCSLII interface C2435A C2436HA HZ C2437HA HZ C2438A C2439HA HZ JA JZ C2440HA HZ JA JZ C3032T C3033T C3034T C3035T C3036T C3037U C3038U A3058A The C2425JK and C2427JK can also be connected but will not use the Wide SCSI capability 5 The following disk devices can be configured to a Series 800 CIO Single Ended SCSI II interface C2462F R C2474F R S C2476F R A3182A 6 Specifying scsi2 causes cio_ca0 to be included automatically in the kernel 7 Specifying disc3 causes target to be included automatically in the kernel 8 The following disk devices can be configured to a Series 800 HP PB Single Ended SCSI II interface 7957B 7958B 7959B A1999A A2655A A2657A C2212A C2213A C2281 A C2282A C2290A C2291A C2460F R C2461F R 24708 C24718 C2472F R S C2473F R S C3020T C3022R T C3023R RZ T C3024R RZ T C3027U C3028U C3040R T C3041R T C3044U A3182A C3560U Models shown in parenthesis are obsolete and are listed for reference only 9 The following disk devices can be configured to a Series 800 Fast Wide Differential SCSLII interface C2435A C2436HA H
46. bit per line This results in faster speed than serial transmission and is preferred for configuring printers plotters and scanners On Series 700 workstations the centronics parallel interface is provided as a standard feature Series 800 systems may have a parallel interface on the multi functional I O card personality card supplied standard with the computer or on an optional SCSI Centronics interface card Centronics is not supported on Series 800 CIO systems Table 2 6 Centronics Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface card Interface Driver Series 700 Core I O internal Centit Series 800 HP PB 28655A lpro 1 Specifying CentIf causes ChrDrv to be included in the kernel Configuring Interface Cards 2 11 EISA Configuration Guidelines When configuring an interface card to the EISA bus the eisa device driver must be present in the kernel that is it must be listed in stand system Because EISA is a set of services used by other interfaces configuring EISA cards is done differently than for other HP UX interfaces Refer to Appendix A EISA Configuration for detailed information on configuring EISA cards and using the sbin eisa_config utility Swapping to an EISA Device If you are adding a device to your system that you plan to use as a primary swap device and the device will be connected to an EISA card you must perform the task in the following order 1 Shut down the sys
47. c t d derives from ioscan output c is the card instance number for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the tape drive is attached t is the SCSI address d is the device number BEST represents the operational capabilities likely to be required including the highest density format and data compression if supported by the device b n nb designates tape positioning b is Berkeley style that is after file close the tape is not repositioned in any way If b is not designated AT amp T style tape closing occurs that is the tape might be positioned after the end of file EOF point n designates no rewind 4 Naming convention for systems installed with short file names For c t d see footnote 3 represents the highest density format and data compression if the device supports it Or i represents a pointer into a tape device property table For b n nb see footnote 3 5 Syntax available for backward compatibility designates tape drive at card instance The m mb mn and mnb device special files are linked to c t d BEST c t d BESTb c t d BESTn and c t d BESTnb respectively 6 Specifying scsi2 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa drivers to be included automatically in the kernel 7 Specifying tape2 causes tape2_included to be included automatically in the kernel 8 Tape drives listed in footnote 1 are supported on Series 800 HP PB architecture as are A2311A and A2312A StorageTek models 4220 and 4280 tape drives
48. connect the printer to any other interface that is serial SCSI HP IB or using the network you may need to reset hardware switches Consult the printer hardware manual for information Follow any interface specific recommendations given in the hardware documentation regarding setting device address Software Concerns Consult the tables in Selecting Device Drivers for Your Printer or Plotter to identify the drivers compatible with the printer or plotter and interface to which it is being connected m Once you have determined all of these items proceed to the sections Configuring a Printer Using HP UX Commands and Configuring a Plotter or other Non Automatically Configurable Output Devices Using HP UX Commands 7 4 Configuring Printers and Plotters Selecting Device Drivers for Your Printer or Plotter Use this section to identify the device drivers required for your printer configuration based on the model of printer or plotter and the interface to which it is attached Guidelines for Configuring a Printer or Plotter to an HP IB Interface m Determine which HP IB address es are being used by other devices on the HP IB card Use the worksheet at the end of this book to keep track of addresses m You are limited to eight devices per HP IB card addresses 0 through 7 m Do not place a plotter on the same HP IB interface used by your disk or tape drives it will substantially diminish the disk or tape s
49. current edition The printing date will change when a new edition is printed Minor changes may be made at reprint without changing the printing date The manual part number will change when extensive changes are made Manual updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document product changes To ensure that you receive the updated or new editions you should subscribe to the appropriate product support service See your HP sales representative for details First Edition January 1995 HP UX Release 10 0 Contents 1 Getting Started Peripheral Configuration in its Simplest Terms 1 2 Using SAM to Configure Peripherals re 1 3 Using HP UX Commands to Configure Peripherals Loe ee 1 4 Exceptions Drivers insf Cannot Recognize 1 1 4 Understanding I O Convergence So ee 1 5 Understanding Device Special File Names a 1 6 Sample Device Special File Names aooaa a a aaa 1 7 Decoding Device Special Files with Issf 2 2 2 1 1 8 Viewing the System Configuration with ioscan 2 1 9 Terse Listing of ioscan So 1 9 Understanding Hardware Addresses rs io A Understanding the Description in ioscan 2 LII Full Listing of ioscan es oe Understanding Class and Instance Lo 1 12 An Example Showing Correlation Between Card Instance and Device Files 1 13 Identifying Device Special Files Associated with a Peripheral Device L 14 Configuring HP UX for any Per
50. d is the device unit number alb specifies disk platter number and surface 5 The following optical disk library products are supported on the Series 800 CIO bus C1700C C1704A C C1705A C C1708C Note libraries with a T suffix are not supported 6 Specifying scsi2 causes cio_ca0 to be included automatically in the kernel 7 Specifying disc3 causes target to be included automatically in the kernel 8 Specifying scsil causes sio pfail and pa drivers to be included in the kernel 5 6 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices Configuring HP UX for a Magneto Optical Disk Library The simplest way to configure a magneto optical disk library is to use SAM usr sbin sam If SAM is not loaded on your system or if you prefer to use the command line interface the following procedure will guide you through the task Understand the instructions before getting started 1 On your host computer system invoke usr sbin ioscan fn to figure out what addresses are available on the SCSI interface to which you ll be attaching the optical disk library Observe the following single ended SCSI guidelines m Each host adapter card has a maximum of seven available SCSI addresses 6 0 in order of descending priority with address seven reserved for the host adapter a The optical disk library systems C1120A and C17zzA C T use up to 5 five SCSI addresses one for each of the magneto optical disk drives and one for the autochanger mechanism m Observe
51. disk drive 4 26 printers and plotters 7 27 terminal or modem 3 27 MSG_ONLY example 8 7 noncritical operation 8 9 mt 7 C 7 mt_property_type C 7 multi function cards B 7 multi function personality cards 28639 60001 3 5 A1703 60008 3 5 A1703 60022 3 5 and networking configuration 2 20 Index 15 hardware addresses on B 8 SCSI Parallel MUX B 9 multiplexers reset using sbin dasetup 3 32 multi processing system bus architecture B 11 multi user mode 3 28 mux0 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 7 18 C 8 mux2 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 7 18 8 5 C 8 mux4 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 7 18 8 5 C 8 MUX based multi function cards B 7 MUX connectivity 2 5 MUX interface for non HP console 3 13 N naming device special files for printers and plotters 7 18 network interfaces 2 20 newfs 1M 4 13 NFS installing and administering 4 27 special considerations 4 26 nm 1 C 14 non HP terminal emulation limitations to 3 20 no rewind bit 6 2 C 7 o obsolete products disk drives 4 5 4 7 4 9 plotters 7 6 printers 7 5 7 9 7 11 tape drives 6 2 6 4 6 5 on line help eisa_config A 6 OpenView DTC Manager software 2 8 OpenView Software Distributor Administrator s Guide 8 4 OSF 1 file system layout 4 15 osid C 8 Index 16 P pa 2 5 2 16 2 18 2 23 3 5 4 5 4 7 4 9 5 4 5 6 6 2 6 4 7 6 7 7 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 8 5 parallel configuration requirements for plotters 7 12 for print
52. graphics configuration be sure to update the configuration files used by your application programs For example if you are adding a CRX24 or CRX48 and using it as a console you must 1 Note the hardware path in which you insert the card 2 Identify the device special file for the CRX24 By default the minor number of the console device special file is 0x000000 3 Make sure the files in the etc X11 directory refer to the correct device special file for the console 4 Change the console path in BOOT_ADMIN to match the hardware path into which you insert the card For example BOOT_ADMIN gt path console graphics2 You can display the correlation between the PDC names and hardware paths by using the info query at the BOOT_ADMIN prompt Configuring Interface Cards 2 15 HP FL Configuration Guidelines The HP FL interface based on fiber optic technology is used where radio frequency interference poses problems or for high security since communication between the SPU and disks transmit without radiated signals HP FL is suited to large disk configurations particularly when the SPU is distant from the source of data HP FL is not supported on Series 700 computers Table 2 9 HP FL Interface Cards and Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface Driver Series 800 CIO A27111A disc2 ChannelSpan A1749A disc2 Series 800 CIO emulation on HP PB2 Series 800 HP P B 28615A disc4
53. hardware path 56 slot number times 4 usr sbin ioscan C lanmux f Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description lanmux O 56 lanmux0 CLAIMED INTERFACE LAN Console For more information on using ioscan consult Chapter 1 Getting Started and the ioscan 1M manpage Configuring Interface Cards 2 31 For Further Information on Interface Cards For information on any device drivers consult the Section 7 manpages in the HP UX Reference most of which deals with interfaces For further information on DTCs consult the following manpages in the HP UX Reference dp 4 Dedicated ports file used by DDFA and DTC port ID ddfa 7 DTC device file access software Another useful resource for RS 232 C connectivity is the Racking and Cabling Guide for DTCs HP part number 5961 0373 For information on graphics configuration and use consult the HP Starbase X Windows and RTAP Plus documentation sets as well as any other documentation pertinent to the application programs you are running 2 32 Configuring Interface Cards 3 Configuring Terminals and Modems This chapter contains the procedures for configuring terminals and modems to serial RS 232 C ports For HP UX to communicate with a terminal or modem the following conditions must be met m The serial device driver required to communicate with the device must be part of the kernel m The terminal or modem must be physically attached and c
54. identify any more specifically what instrument is attached but it can communicate with it asr sbin ioscan M instrO H 56 48 5 asr sbin ioscan kf Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description be o root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS be 1 56 be CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Bus Converter ext_bus 1 56 40 hpf11 CLAIMED INTERFACE HP 28615A HP FL Interface lanmux O 56 44 Lanmux0 CLAIMED INTERFACE HP J2146A 802 3 LAN lan 1 56 44 1 lan3 CLAIMED INTERFACE ext bus 2 56 48 hpibl CLAIMED INTERFACE HP 28650B HP IB Interface instr O 56 48 5 instro NOHU DEVICE HP IB Instrument 6 Create a device special file for the plotter by invoking usr sbin insf with the H hardware path option for example usr sbin insf H 56 48 5 This installs the device special file for the hardware path and instrO You can verify this by executing ioscan H 56 48 5 fn to see the file name and then lssf lt filename gt to see the device file s attributes 7 26 Configuring Printers and Plotters Your next step will be to configure the LP spooler to enable you to send print jobs to the plotter for procedure see Managing Printers and Printer Output of the HP UX System Administration Tasks manual Moving a Printer or Plotter To move a printer or plotter first remove it and then add it to your configuration This sample procedure demonstrates attaching a printer to a different interface card 1 Notify users that you are moving the print
55. kernel 4 10 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Configuring HP UX for a New Disk Device The simplest way to configure a disk device hard disk floppy disk disk array or CD ROM is to use SAM usr sbin sam If SAM is not loaded on your system or if you prefer to use the command line interface the following procedure will guide you through the task Familiarize yourself with the instructions before getting started 1 Invoke usr sbin ioscan fn to figure out what addresses are available on the interface card to which you will be attaching the disk For examples of ioscan usage consult Using ioscan to Display your I O Configuration in Appendix B of this book 2 Consult the tables in the previous section Selecting Device Drivers for a Disk Device and Interface to determine the device driver s needed for your disk and interface If you are configuring a magneto optical device use the table in the section Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Guidelines found in the next chapter If any necessary device driver is absent from the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how to rebuild the kernel a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel as follows cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system The system_pre
56. new A 13 screen oriented applications running on a non console terminal 3 12 SCSI addressing 2 23 addressing range for single ended SCSI 6 5 bus support 2 22 bus width 2 22 cable length 2 26 cables 2 26 cabling 2 24 cabling limits 4 8 configuration guidelines 2 22 device address priority 4 8 device installation 2 28 device maximum 2 23 differential 2 22 disk array powerfail 4 8 disk configuration guidelines 4 8 disk device drivers 4 8 fast wide 2 22 fast wide differential limitations 4 8 fiber optic extender cable 2 25 floppy disk device drivers 4 10 grounding 2 26 inquiry response 4 37 limitations 2 23 line out 2 22 LUN bits C 8 parity checking 2 28 power status 2 3 priorities of addresses 2 23 signal termination 2 27 single ended 2 22 single ended limitations 4 8 tape device drivers 6 5 Index 20 target bits C 8 termination 2 27 6 8 third party peripherals 2 28 types and characteristics 2 22 scsil 2 23 5 4 5 6 7 13 scsi2 2 23 4 9 5 4 5 6 7 13 scsi3 2 23 SCSI addressing determining availability 1 9 SCSI ATN bits C 11 SCSI configuration requirements for printers 7 13 SCSI Fiber Optical Extender 28643A 2 24 SCSI LUN bits C 11 SCSI Parallel MUX multi functional card B 9 SCSI pass through driver C 11 SCSI target bits C 11 sctl 2 23 5 4 5 6 C 8 sdisk 4 9 5 4 5 6 C 8 in sample ioscan output 5 9 section number bits C 8 selecting device drivers
57. obtained from NVM not the card Either an ISA card is present but not its driver or the driver is present but not the card Since ISA cards do not identify themselves only the card s driver can verify its existence Ensure the card in installed and verify that the driver is configured into the kernel EISA Board ID eisa_id ignored Driver not configured into kernel The system found the EISA card but not its driver Verify that the driver is configured into the kernel EISA Board ID etsa_td ignored error initializing board A driver accepted this card but failed to initialize it This is probably a defective card EISA eisa_last_attach not called bad driver in kernel If a driver does return correctly from its attach routine this will panic the kernel Assuming that the drivers installed are working this message should never appear If you are using a non HP card and driver remove both the card and driver and try again If error does not recur the non HP driver is bad If the error recurs call your HP representative EISA WARNING mapping in system board failed EISA WARNING mapping in I 0 map entries failed System encountered problems either in creating virtual to physical mappings of the EISA system board registers or in attempting to initialize a system board resource If either of these messages appear while booting from EISA SCSI the system will fail to boot If booting from other than EISA SCSI the EISA c
58. performance A dedicated HP IB interface is recommended for a plotter m On Series 800 CIO systems HP IB printers default to Ciper and Amigo protocol although some devices can be configured using the instrO device driver Other options are to consider converting the printer to a parallel interface or configuring the printer to the LAN via an HP JetDirect card m On Series 700 systems printers attached to an HP IB EISA interface do not have their device files created automatically by insf If not using SAM you will need to create the device special files using mknod Since hpib is the driver that actually controls the printer use the hpib driver as the basis for the device special file A sample procedure Creating a Device Special File 7 for an HP IB Printer is provided later in this chapter Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 5 Table 7 1 HP IB Printer Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Series 700 EISA 25560A1 cs80 see note hshpib hpib Series 800 CIO 27110B4 hpibo dev c t d _1p lpro or lpri 1 The following models can be configured to the HP 25560A Series 700 EISA HP IB interface card C1602A 3630A eisa_config identifies the card as HWPOC70 2 When these drivers are specified the following additional drivers are also included in the kernel wsio core eisa eeprom 3 insf does not create a default device fi
59. respawn tells init to restart the process if it dies for any reason The usr sbin getty is the process used to open the port and provide the initial login prompt m The h option ensures that the getty will set the port speed before resetting the port which is crucial for the modem to work properly m The t 240 is a security option to require that the user login name and password is typed within 240 seconds m The ttyd2p5 is the device for modem port through which the getty will receive incoming calls getty will complete the device name by prefixing dev to the port designation m The 9600 does not represent the baud rate but represents a label in the etc gettydefs file See gettydefs 4 6 After saving the file invoke the following command to activate the updated etc inittab file sbin init q 3 24 Configuring Terminals and Modems 10 11 With modem still disconnected from the port but powered on the DTR or 3 To verify that getty is running on the port in a pending state execute ps ef grep ttyd2p5 using the device file name for which the getty was created You should see a question mark in the tty field TR light should be off Connect the modem to its port DTR or TR light should come on This verifies that the port not the modem is setting DTR or TR If DTR or TR light remains on all the time the modem has DTR strapped high and setting should be changed Check the modem users manual for procedu
60. switches or jumpers but instead use a configuration CFG file provided by the manufacturer to specify board resources The eisa_config program requires a CFG file for every ISA and EISA board to allocate resources throughout the E ISA bus The CFG file enables eisa_config to assess all E ISA resources and in the case of an EISA board configure it automatically Although it cannot configure an ISA board automatically eisa_config can report likely switch or jumper settings for conflict free configuration Note however that some configurations are simply not possible as when two boards from different manufacturers require the same resource If this happens only one of the boards can be used Each board connected to the workstation on the E ISA bus must have a CFG file present in the sbin lib eisa directory These files are read by sbin bcheckrc each time you reboot the system CFG files are named with the following syntax rXXXnnnN CFG where r is either or a hexadecimal digit XXX abbreviates the board manufacturer s name nnn represents the product ID N represents the revision level Figure A 1 shows an excerpted EISA configuration file named HWPOC80 CFG which contains blocks of board specific information functions and choices within the functions The eisa_config program selects a choice for each function If the first default choice conflicts with that of another board on the bus eisa_config selects anothe
61. system_prep v s system c Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s d Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system e Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev f Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 4 Bring down the system with sufficient grace period to allow users to exit their files You can execute usr sbin shutdown r or usr sbin reboot If you are installing an interface card bring the system to a halt that is use the h option See shutdown 1M or reboot 1M in the HP UX Reference Power off all peripherals and then the SPU Perform the physical installation as described in the hardware manual accompanying the interface card or other device Power on all peripherals and then the SPU 3 8 Configuring Terminals and Modems Once the system boots from the newly created kernel HP UX detects the new terminal and associates it with its driver insf automatically creates the device special files necessary to communicate directly with the terminal Invoke usr sbin ioscan C tty
62. systems on the disk you are moving are exported a Find the NFS clients by logging in to the NFS server and looking at the etc exports file Refer to exports 4 in the HP UX Reference b Notify the users on the NFS client systems that data on the disk being relocated will be inaccessible temporarily users on a diskless system will be unable to use their system at all c Unmount the file systems from the NFS client If you do not unmount the file systems from the client the client will receive NFS error messages when accessing the files on the disk There are several methods to unmount the NFS client file systems i Enter the Remote Administration area of SAM on the NFS server and unmount the file systems remotely ii Log in directly to each NFS client and unmount the file systems using either SAM or HP UX commands Refer to the file systems chapter of the HP UX System Administration Tasks for specific instructions on unmounting file systems For detailed information on Network File Systems refer to Installing and Administering NFS Services 3 Create a backup copy of the etc fstab file cp etc fstab etc fstab old Edit etc fstab to remove any mount entries for the disk being removed Update the etc fstab on all NFS client systems to remove the mount entries for file systems that are on the disk drive being removed 4 If you are removing an LVM disk a Execute a vgdisplay v command to display the contents of th
63. terminal Part name and number Serial number Cabling Interface card port number Hardware address Dip switch settings Driver device file minor number Modem use baud rate protocol Worksheets D 3 Disk Drives Part name and number Serial number Firmware Revision Number of disks capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers LVM physical volume volume group RAID level use 1 For example file system boot dump swap raw data Part name and number Serial number Firmware Revision Number of disks capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers LVM physical volume volume group RAID level use D 4 Worksheets Part name and number Serial number Firmware Revision Number of disks capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers LVM physical volume volume group RAID level use 1 For example file system boot dump swap raw data Part name and number Serial number Firmware Revision Number of disks capacity Interfa
64. than are available for tape drives configured through the stape tape1 and tape2 drivers See ct 7 in the HP UX Reference Table 6 2 HP IB Cartridge Tape Drive Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device Special Files Series 700 EISA 25560A cs802 dev r ct c t a Series 800 CIO 27110B hpibo same as above disci Series 800 HP PB 28650B hpib1 same as above disci 1 The following models can be configured to EISA CIO and HP PB HP IB interfaces 35401 7914CT 7946 7974A 7978B 7979A 7980A 9144A 9145A Models shown in parenthesis are obsolete and are listed for reference only 2 Specifying cs80 causes hshpib wsio eisa core and eeprom to be included automatically into the kernel 3 c t d derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the tape drive is attached t is the address of the tape device on the HP IB bus d is the device number d1 must be used to address cartridge tape drive component of the disk tape combination devices such as 7946 For cartridge tape drives to communicate through HP UX minor number bit 25 of the device special file must be set See Appendix C for mapping of disc1 minor number bit assignments 4 Specifying hpibO causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included automatically in the kernel 5 Specifying disc1 causes disci_incl
65. the intended interface with the printer 2 Execute usr sbin lsdev d printer_driver to see whether the driver is already in the kernel If it is you might see output resembling the following shown for a Series 700 parallel interface usr sbin lsdev d CentIf Character Block Driver 216 1 CentIf For a Series 800 parallel interface executing usr sbin lsdev d lpr2 might show similar output but the character major number is 181 In both Series 700 and 800 systems the interface class is ext_bus 3 Determine how much additional configuration is needed for the printer by invoking the command usr sbin ioscan fn dprinter_driver m Ifthe necessary drivers are already present in the kernel the ioscan output of a Series 700 might resemble this usr sbin ioscan fn d CentIf Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus 1 2 0 6 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in Parallel Interface dev c1t0d0_lp 7 14 Configuring Printers and Plotters Similarly the ioscan output for a Series 800 might resemble this usr sbin ioscan fn d lpr2 Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus 2 56 53 ipr2 CLAIMED INTERFACE HP28655A Parallel Interface dev c2t0d0_lp Both cases show that the drivers and device special files are present allowing HP UX to communicate with the printer You can attach your printer without further operating system configuration and without bringing dow
66. the maximum single ended SCSI cable length of six meters 2 Using the hardware documentation as your primary source m Physically set up the optical disk library separate from the host system m Assign unique SCSI addresses to each disk drive and autochanger mechanism and record the information m Run the recommended tests 3 Consult Table 5 3 to determine the device drivers needed for your magneto optical disk library and interface If any necessary device driver is absent from the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how to do so a Change directory to the build environment stand build Execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel and writes a system file in your current directory That is it creates stand build system The v gives verbose explanation as the script executes Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 5 7 cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new sys
67. the print request over the LAN to the printer If printer basil is configured to a terminal using Terminal Session Manager TSM as shown in Figure 7 3 only the user logged into that terminal has access to the printer terminal HP UX system HP UX system printer lt using gt hyacinth primrose basil TSH TSM 7 Figure 7 3 Terminal Session Manager TSM Access to a Printer This chapter discusses configuration of local and remote printers and plotters only For network configuration use SAM and HP JetDirect For TSM configuration use the Terminal Session Manager User s Guide Consult the X Station User s Guide for the HP 700 RX or HP VUE 3 0 User s Guide for information on configuring a printer into an X or VUE environment Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 3 Hardware Concerns Some plotters particularly electrostatic plotters with vector to raster converters are not customer installable Attempting to install them might introduce defects which will invalidate your warranty These prohibitions should be clearly noted in the documentation accompanying the plotter Call your local HP Sales and Support Office for a certified representative to install and set up the HP plotter properly A list of worldwide HP offices is included in the accessories package accompanying the plotter As shipped from the factory the printer is likely to be set up to operate in parallel mode if you intend to
68. through 15 that is NN in hexadecimal OxNNOOOO encode the card instance of the interface card through which the device communicates Table C 2 Bit Assignments for Tape Devices bits 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 stape SCSI target SCSI LUN 24 BSD behavior at close tape2 25 No rewind 26 Configuration method 27 31 Index Density2 tape1 HP IB device HP IB unit 24 BSD behavior at close 25 No rewind 26 Configuration method 27 31 Index Density2 1 If 1 bits 27 31 mean Index If 0 bits 27 31 mean Density 2 Index and Density are generated as needed by mksf 1M Density is encoded as a field in the minor number using a constant of the form DEN_M_ as defined in usr include sys mtio h Index refers to an index into the property table used to specify extended configuration options using the mt_property_type data structure defined in usr include sys mtio h For further discussion see mt 7 in the HP UX Reference Major and Minor Numbers C 7 Table C 3 Bit Assignments for Disk and Magneto Optical Devices bits 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 disc1 16 Reserved 0 17 19 HP IB address CS80 unit 24 Diagnostic access 25 Cartridge tape 26 27 Reserved Section number 0 whole disk disc2 16 Reserved 17 19 HP FL device HP FL unit always 0 24 Diagnostic access 25 26 Reserved Section number disc3 SCSI target SCSI LUN Rese
69. will also configure successfully using the HP PB single ended SCSI device driver however these tape drives must be the only peripheral device on their SCSI bus 9 Specifying scsil causes sio pfail and pa drivers to be included automatically in the kernel 6 6 Configuring Tape Drives Configuring HP UX for a Tape Drive The simplest way to configure a tape drive is to use SAM usr sbin sam If SAM is not loaded on your system or if you prefer to use the command line interface the following procedure will guide you through the task Understand the instructions before getting started 1 Invoke usr sbin ioscan fn to figure out what addresses are available on the interface card to which you will be attaching the tape drive For examples of ioscan usage consult Using ioscan to Display Your I O Configuration in Appendix B of this book 2 Determine the device drivers needed for your tape drive and interface by consulting Table 6 1 Table 6 2 or Table 6 3 in the previous section Selecting Device Drivers for a Tape Device and Interface If any necessary device driver is absent from the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel and writes a system file in your current directory That is it creates stand build system The v
70. with identical E ISA boards you can streamline the configuration task as follows 1 Invoke sbin eisa_config on the first system and configure the E ISA boards to your satisfaction Save the configuration in a system sci file instead of to NVM EISA save system sci Complete the configuration task for the first workstation by exiting eisa_config making any necessary physical changes to the boards and rebooting the system When you are ready to configure other workstations copy the CFG and system sci files from the first workstation to those systems Note if the workstations share a file system you might not need to copy the files at all On each of the other workstations invoke eisa_config using the n option which initializes the E ISA configuration from system sci eisa_config n system sci Save the new E ISA configuration using the save command By default eisa_config records the configuration in the NVM and to etc eisa system sci Optionally if you specify a file for example tmp sci as an argument to the save command eisa_config records the configuration to the specified file EISA save tmp sci Successfully saved configuration in tmp sci A 16 EISA Board Configuration You can copy the tmp sci file to the systems for which you are duplicating the original configuration Then from eisa_config on the new system use the init command to write the configuration to
71. 1 Transmit 9600 Receive Transmit XOFF at 64 8 Bits No Parity console 1 Stop Bit console No Local Echo Data Leads Only Limited Transmit No Auto Answerback Answerback Not Concealed General Set Up VT100 Mode VT100 ID User Defined Keys Unlocked User Features Unlocked Numeric Keypad Normal Cursor Keys No New Line UPSS DEC Supplemental When Available Update Keyboard Set Up Caps Lock Auto Repeat Keyclick High Margin Bell Off Warning Bell High Character Mode KX Backspace Local Compose Ignore Alt F1 Hold F2 Print F3 Set Up F4 Session F5 Break lt and Keys lt gt Key Key Printer Set Up Speed 4800 No Printer to Host Normal Print Mode XOFF 8 Bits No Parity 1 Stop Bit Print Full Page Print National Only No Terminator Tabs Set Up 8 spaces apart starting in column 9 1 The mode and ID can be VT100 or VT320 depending on which model is being emulated 2 You may need to configure this key from Delete to Backspace To do so use the stty command as follows stty erase lt backspace_key gt Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 15 Your VT420 terminal is now configured for use as an HP UX system console Please be aware that the configuration is based solely on the VT100 default configuration You may notice the following differences between the DEC VT100 VT320 or VT420 terminals and an HP terminal Tabl
72. 1 C 2 The Essentials of Peripheral Configuration Excerpted Terse ioscan Output from a Series 800 Model E Terse ioscan H Output from a Model 770 Excerpted ioscan f Output from a Model 770 Device Special File in Relation to Hardware Path and Instance Role of Drivers in Configuring Interface Cards and Peripheral Devices Serial Connectivity via Distribution Panels o or DTC HP Fiber Optic Connectivity Local and Remote Access to a Printer Network Access to a Printer Terminal Session Manager TSM Access to a Printer Sample Configuration of an Uninterruptible Power System UPS A Sample etc ups_ conf File Guidelines for Setting Shutdown Options A Sample CFG File re Model 712 Bus Relationships Model 725 100 Bus Relationships ioscan output for a Model 725 Model 770 J Series Bus Relationships HP 9000 Model E Bus Relationships Typical I O Addressing for a MUX SCSI Multi Function Card Basic Addressing on Models F G H I and 8x7 Systems HP 9000 T500 Configuration and Bus Relationships ioscan Output from a Model T500 a Model 8x9 K Series Bus Relationships Device Special Files Contain Major and Minor Numbers Driver Number dev_t Format Contents 8 1 2 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 13 2 1 2 7 2 17 7 2 7 3 7 3 8 3 8 7 8 8 A 3 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 9 B 10 B 12 B 13 B 14 C 2 C 4 Tables 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12
73. 2 lureduce 1M 4 27 luremove 1M 4 27 lurmboot 1M 4 32 vgchange 1M 4 22 4 25 4 27 4 32 vgexport 1M 4 22 4 27 vgimport 1M 4 25 vgscan 1M 4 24 4 27 LVM maintenance mode booting in 4 31 lurmboot 1M 4 32 magneto optical disk drives C1701A 5 4 C1701C 5 4 C1716C 5 9 C2550B 5 4 device special files created 5 4 further tasks 5 11 product ID strings 5 4 magneto optical disk libraries C1100A 5 6 C1150A 5 6 Index 14 C1160A 5 6 C1170A 5 6 C1700C T 5 6 C1704A C T 5 6 C1705A C T 5 6 C1708C 5 9 C1708C T 5 6 capacity 5 2 device drivers 5 6 device special files created 5 6 further tasks 5 11 installation 5 1 installation planning 5 2 I O limitations 5 2 SCSI addresses 2 23 SCSI addressing guidelines 5 7 surfaces bits C 8 magneto optical disks access 5 2 device drivers 5 2 5 4 powerfail support 5 2 surfaces 5 2 use as mountable file system 5 2 uses and limitations 5 1 writing to 5 1 magneto optical media capacity 5 3 ratings 5 3 major and minor numbers in device special files C 2 major numbers and device drivers C 3 defined C 3 dynamic assignment and ranges C 3 Managing SwitchOver UX 7 30 mapfile creating an LVM 4 22 master files C 3 maximum device connections by interface card 2 4 maximum disk space 4 3 mediainit 1 4 18 5 5 minor numbers bit assignments C 7 bit setting for tape drives 6 4 creating C 4 defined C
74. 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 1 5 2 Maximum Recommended Device Connections by Interface Multiplexer Connectivity Configuration Requirements Distribution Panels DCE and DTE Pin Assignments RS 232 C Interconnections Centronics Configuration Requirements Graphics Card Configuration Requirements Graphics Enhancement Capabilities HP FL Interface Cards and Configuration Requirements HP IB Configuration Requirements Network Interfaces and initial Configuration Requirements Types of SCSI and Characteristics SCSI Configuration Requirements SCSI Cables Fast Wide SCSI Cables Example of SCSI Cable Length Calculation SCSI Terminators Serial Configurations for Terminals and Modems Key Terminal Configuration Parameters Configuration Values for vt100 Compatibility Unique Definitions of VT100 Keys Wyse 60 Default Configuration Values Function Key Mappings Device Special Files for Modems HP IB Disk Configuration Requirements HP FL Disk Configuration Requirements SCSI I Disk Configuration Requirements Floppy Disk Drive Configuration Requirements Magneto Optical Media Capacity by Size Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Requirements 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 13 2 14 2 16 2 18 2 20 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 3 5 3 12 3 15 3 16 3 19 3 21 3 22 4 6 4 7 4 9 4 10 5 3 5 4 Contents 9 5
75. 232A disk arrays The configuration utilities for these devices are unavailable using a command line interface If you are configuring any other disk arrays be sure that you have loaded onto your system the C2400 UTIL fileset containing the disk array configuration tools Consult the hardware documentation to find out what degree of data protection is provided by the RAID level in which the disk array is shipped If you need to modify the RAID level use the disk array utilities provided If you are configuring a disk array with more than one controller you will be using more than one target address Be sure you choose a SCSI interface with sufficient bus addresses available Do not attempt to use disk space larger than 4GB without apportioning the space with LVM HP UX cannot address disk space in excess of 4GB any remaining disk space would be unusable Given this maximum size limitation hard partitions will work Similarly boot dump or primary swap cannot be greater than 2GB You can use Logical Volume Manager LVM to partition disk arrays into logical volumes manage mirrored file systems and deal with file systems on disk arrays in independent mode See HP UX System Administration Tasks for documentation on configuring and managing file systems on LVM Take care to terminate all busses Keep cabling including internal SCSI cabling to within recommended bounds Considerations for Configuring a CD ROM Drive CD ROM drive
76. 3 examples C 6 mkboot 1M example 4 28 mk_kernel 1M 1 15 2 29 3 7 4 11 4 17 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 24 C 11 C 15 mknod 1M 7 21 C 16 mksf 1M 4 21 6 1 6 10 7 18 and data compression 6 5 6 11 for modem configuration 3 4 used for creating device files for modems 3 22 Model 712 B 3 Model 712 floppy disk configuration 4 10 Model 725 B 4 Model 770 J Series B 6 Model E B 7 Models 890 and T500 B 11 Models 8x7 B 10 Models 8x9 K Series B 14 Models F G H 1 B 10 modems access mode 3 22 AT command 3 25 autoanswer 3 26 baud rate 3 3 bit assignments C 8 BREAK 3 26 CCITT control signals 3 26 CCITT protocol 3 3 configuring 3 6 creating device special files 3 22 device file for dial in port 3 22 device file for dial out port 3 22 device file for direct connect 3 22 Index DTR 3 26 duplex control 2 7 editing etc uucp Devices 3 25 hardware flow control CTS RTS 3 26 Hayes modem protocol 3 26 moving using HP UX commands 3 27 planning to configure 3 3 removing using HP UX commands 3 27 removing using SAM 3 27 requirements specific to HP UX 3 26 system side configuration 3 6 testing call out ability 3 25 troubleshooting approach 3 26 using mksf 1M 3 22 UUCP 3 3 modem type bit C 8 modifying the printer address 7 28 mouse device bits C 11 moving E ISA boards A 14 ISA boards A 14 Moving HP UX 9 2 Code and Scripts to 10 4 15 moving peripherals
77. 4 11 4 17 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 24 C 11 bus architecture multi processing system B 11 bus relationships Model 712 B 3 Model 725 B 4 Model 770 J Series B 6 Model E B 7 Models 8x9 K Series B 14 Models F G T I 8x7 B 11 Model T500 B 11 c C1006A G W 3 5 C1007A G W 3 5 C1017A G W 3 5 C1064A G GX W WX 3 5 C1065A G W 3 5 C1080A G W 3 5 C1083W 3 5 C1084W 3 5 C1085W 3 5 C2400 UTIL fileset for disk array tools 4 3 c700 2 23 4 9 5 4 5 6 c720 2 23 4 9 cable length SCSI 2 26 cables 10833A B C D 2 19 92222A B C D 2 24 C2900A 2 24 C2901A 2 24 C2902A 2 24 C2903A 2 24 C2906A 2 24 C2907A 2 24 C2908A 2 24 C2911A 2 24 for SwitchOver configurations 2 25 HP FL 2 17 K2296 2 24 K2297 2 24 PBus 2 17 cabling guidelines HP FL 2 17 HP IB 2 19 RS 232 C devices 2 9 SCSI 2 24 capacities magneto optical disk 5 3 capacity magneto optical disk libraries 5 2 card instance C 5 and class 1 6 and interface card 1 6 correlating device files 1 13 defined 1 6 cartridge tape bit C 8 case fold bit C 8 CCITT C 8 CCITT protocol for modem 3 3 control signals 3 26 cdevsw C 3 CD ROM configuration planning 4 3 cent 7 7 23 CentIf 2 11 7 11 7 12 7 23 handshake modes 7 23 CentIf C 8 centronics configuration requirements for plotters 7 12 for printers 7 11 centronics interface 2 11 CFG files A 2 Index checking for correctness A 18 forma
78. 4 2 diskinfo 1M 4 1 4 13 4 37 5 3 disk model number finding out 4 37 disks drives further tasks 4 38 disktab 4 4 1 4 4 4 21 distribution panels 0950 2431 2 7 28659 60005 2 7 5062 3054 2 7 5062 3070 2 7 5062 3085 2 7 5181 2085 2 7 ADP 422 5062 3085 2 5 ADP 5062 3070 2 5 characterized 2 7 DDP 5062 3066 2 5 DDP 5181 2085 2 5 MDP 5062 3054 2 5 purpose of 2 7 RJ45 0950 2431 2 5 serial connectivity 2 7 driver behavior controlling C 2 Driver Development Guide Series 700 resource 4 5 driver install table C 3 driver library location of C 13 driver statement C 11 DTC Manager software 2 8 DTCs purpose of 2 7 serial connectivity 2 7 dump managing when moving a root LVM disk 4 26 managing when removing a disk 4 35 dynamically assigned major numbers C 3 E eeprom 2 18 2 23 6 4 7 6 7 7 eisa 2 18 2 23 4 9 6 4 7 6 7 7 EISA boards A 1 A 2 defined 2 12 HP IB printers 7 6 incompatibility of most HP IB tape drives 6 2 SCSI disk drives 4 9 SCSI tape drives 6 5 E ISA boards changing choices for board functions A 10 choices A 3 moving A 14 removing A 15 resources A 2 setting switches and jumpers A 13 troubleshooting configuration A 18 eisa_config exiting A 13 log file A 13 eisa_config automatic mode A 1 changing choices for board functions A 10 correcting an error A 8 example session A 6 initializing configuration A 8 interactive mode A
79. 47 C 8 disc3 2 16 49 4 10 5 4 5 6 C 8 disc4 2 16 4 7 C 8 disk class in sample ioscan output 5 9 disk array configuration planning 4 3 RAID levels 4 3 disk drives 7907A 4 5 7T914CT P R ST 4 5 Index 5 7933H 4 5 C2259B HA 4 7 7935H 4 5 C2281A 4 9 7936FL 4 7 C2282A 4 9 7936H 4 5 C2290A 4 9 T937FL 4 7 C2291 A 4 9 7937H 4 5 C2293A T U 4 9 7957A B 4 5 C2295B 4 9 7957B 4 9 C2425JK 4 9 7958A B 4 5 C2427JK 4 9 7958B 4 9 C2460F R 4 9 7959B 4 5 4 9 C2461F R 4 9 7962B 4 5 C2462F R 4 9 7963B 4 5 C2470S 4 9 9127A 4 5 C2471S 4 9 9153C 4 5 C2472F R S 4 9 9262B 4 5 C2473F R S 4 9 9263B 4 5 C2473T 4 9 97902B 4 5 C2474F R S 4 9 97903B 4 5 C2ATAJ 4 9 97962B 4 5 C2476F R 4 9 A1999A 4 9 C2481A 4 9 A2655A 4 9 C2482A 4 9 A2657A 4 9 C2491A 4 9 A3058A 4 9 C2492A 4 9 A38182A 4 9 C3020T 4 9 A3231A 4 3 4 9 C3021T 4 9 43232A 4 3 4 9 C3022R T 4 9 and device drivers 4 5 C3023R RZ T 4 9 C1707A 4 5 C3023T 4 9 C2200A 4 5 C3024R RZ T 4 9 C2201A 4 7 C3024T 4 9 C2203A 4 5 C3027U 4 9 C2204A 4 7 C3028U 4 9 C2212 4 9 C3032T 4 9 C2213A 4 9 C3033T 4 9 C2214B 4 9 C3034T 4 9 C2216T 4 9 C3035T 4 9 C2217T 4 9 C3036T 4 9 C2252B BZ HA HZ 4 7 3037 4 9 C2254B BZ HA HZ 4 7 C3038U 4 9 C2258B HA 4 7 C3040R T 4 9 Index 6 C3041R T 4 9 C3044U 4 9 C3560U 4 9 device special files created 4 5 4 7 4 9 moving using HP UX commands 4 26 planning to configure
80. 6 11 stty 1 3 17 3 29 superuser privileges 1 1 Support Watch 8 12 surfaces in magneto optical disk libraries C 8 swap managing when moving a root LVM disk 4 26 managing when removing a disk 4 35 swapinfo 1M 4 19 swapping to EISA devices 2 12 swinstall 8 4 swinstall 1M 3 12 SwitchOver and cabling 2 25 syslogd 8 7 syslogd 1M 8 10 System Administration Manager SAM 3 2 3 3 3 12 system file extracting the 1 15 2 29 3 7 4 11 417 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 24 C 11 Index 22 system_prep script 1 15 2 29 3 7 4 11 4 17 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 24 C 11 system runstate 3 28 T tape1 6 2 C 7 tape2 C 7 tape drives 7890S SX 6 5 7914CT P R 6 4 7946 6 4 T980A XC 6 2 7980S SX 6 5 A2311A 6 5 A2656A 6 5 A2944A 6 5 A3024A 6 5 allowing for trial and error 6 11 avoiding data compression 6 11 C1502A 6 5 C1503A B C 6 5 C1504A B C 6 5 C1511A 6 2 C1512A 6 5 C1520A B 6 5 C1521A B 6 5 C1530B 6 5 C1533A 6 5 C1534A 6 5 C1535A 6 5 C1553A 6 5 C2292A 6 5 C2297T U 6 5 C2298A 6 5 C2463F R 6 5 C2464F R 6 5 C2465F R 6 5 C2466F R 6 5 C2467F R 6 5 C2477F R S U 6 5 C2478U 6 5 configuration bits C 7 configuration strategy 6 1 creating customized device special files 6 10 device special files created 6 2 6 4 6 5 6 8 incompatibility of QIC and older cartridge media 6 10 index density bits C 7 minor number bit setting 6
81. 60001 1 The following terminals are supported for HP UX C1006A G W C1007A G W C1017A G W C1064A G GX W WX C1065A G W C1080A G W C1083W C1084W C1085W VT100 VT320 WYSE60 700 60 700 96 700 98 HP UX supports numerous third party modems 2 Device special files for modems are not created by default See Table 3 7 for information on creating them using mksf 3 See termio 7 and termiox 7 for information 4 mux and tty p derive from ioscan output The numeral after mux and tty is the card instance for the tty class of interface card to which the terminal is connected the numeral after p is the port number of the serial interface 5 Specifying muxO0 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 6 The A1703 60022 and 28639 60001 personality cards are used for console connection 7 Specifying mux2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 8 J2092A and J2096A do not support modems 9 Hard ware flow control is supported on the A1703 60022 for the first eight of 16 ports only 10 Personality card used for console and remote console connection 11 Specifying mux4 causes lanmux0 lantty0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 5 Configuring HP UX for an HP Terminal or for a Modem 1 Determine which driver is required for the terminal or modem by consulting Table 3 1 2 Determine whether the driver is present in the kernel by invokin
82. 7 12 C1633A 7 12 C2847A 7 10 7 12 C2848A 7 10 7 12 C2858A 7 10 7 12 C2859A 7 10 7 12 C3170A 7 10 7 12 C3171A 7 10 7 12 C3180A 7 10 C3181A 7 10 7 12 Index HP IB configuration requirements 7 7 parallel centronics configuration requirements 7 12 serial RS 232 C configuration requirements 7 10 port number bits C 8 ports terminal 3 7 PostScript 7 23 power order for turning on off 4 12 5 9 6 8 power_onoff 1M 8 10 PowerTrust System Guide 8 2 PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System UPS 8 1 12 PowerTrust UPS configuring 8 6 primary boot path setting 4 31 printer and plotter configuration planning 7 2 printers 2227B 7 6 2235B C D 7 6 2354A 7 6 2562C 7 6 7 9 7 11 2563C 7 6 7 9 7 11 2564B 7 27 2564B C 7 6 2565A 7 6 2566B C 7 6 7 9 2566C 7 11 2567B C 7 6 7 9 2567C 7 11 2684A 7 9 2684A P 7 11 2686A D 7 9 7 11 2932A 7 6 7 9 7 11 2934A 7 6 7 9 7 11 33438P 7 11 Index 17 33440A 7 9 7 11 C2567B C 7 11 33447A 7 9 7 11 C2753A 7 13 33449A 7 9 7 11 C2754A 7 13 33459A 7 9 7 11 C2755A 7 13 33471A 7 9 7 11 C2756A 7 13 3630A 7 9 7 11 C2772A 7 13 41063A 7 9 C2773A 7 13 AMIGO protocol 7 6 C2776A 7 13 C1200A 7 9 C2777A 7 13 C1202A 7 6 7 11 CIPER protocol 7 6 C1602A 7 6 7 9 7 11 F100 7 14 C1645A 7 9 7 11 HP IB configuration requirements C1656A 7 11 7 6 C1676A 7 9 LaserJet 4si 7 14 C1686A 7 11 minor numbe
83. 700 disks using Software Disk Striping SDS SDS is not supported on HP UX 10 0 The safest way to import 9 x data from an SDS disk is as follows 1 Isolate the specific files of data 2 Examine the files for presence of system and structural files as documented in the previous section and remove any invalid references 3 Copy the information onto a 10 0 configured disk m Series 700 whole disks 1 Examine all files for the presence of system and structural files as documented in the previous section and remove any invalid references 2 Configure the disk as documented in Configuring into your System an Unpartitioned Disk Already Containing Data shortly insf creates the required device special files to access the whole disks If the disk is used in its entirety as it was on 9 2 the data will be accessed using the cpd m Series 800 disks with hard partitions sections 1 Examine all files for the presence of system and structural files as documented in the previous section and remove any invalid references 2 Configure the disks with Series 800 hard partitions by following the procedure Configuring into Your System a Partitioned Disk Already Containing Data later in this chapter You will create device special files for each section using mksf or mknod The cpd will enable you to access the partitioned data m Series 800 LVM disks 1 Examine all files for the presence of system and structural files as d
84. ACE EISA card HWPOC70 Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 21 Set the HP IB printer device number on the printer itself Assuming for this example that the HP IB device is set to 2 the command line for a device special file called dev hpib_printer would be as follows usr sbin mknod dev hpib_printer c 21 0x032000 5 Once you create the device special file HP UX will be able to communicate with the printer Plug in the printer turn it on and send it a short file It should print 7 22 Configuring Printers and Plotters Guidelines for Configuring a Non HP Printer to a Parallel Port Compatibility problems typical when configuring non HP peripherals to the parallel interface usually involve the handshake mode The CentIf driver provides six handshake modes that can be accessed for different implementations To use them create a custom device special file using specific bits in the minor number When a peripheral is unable to communicate via the parallel port be sure to use the cat command and not lp as a starting point This eliminates problems with model scripts and lpsched If this fails and the peripheral is known to work substitute an HP LaserJet or DeskJet printer and test again If the HP product works the problem may be in the handshake method Be sure that the problem is communication and not the text going to the printer a PostScript printer will always report an error if an ASCII file is sent to it Table C
85. B backplane is a slot priority based system The higher the slot number in which a card is installed the higher the card s priority for gaining access to and communicating over the backplane Thus a card installed at slot 10 has a higher priority than a card at slot 1 m Observe HP recommendations regarding hardware limitations and requirements o Do not exceed recommended cabling lengths or maximum number of peripheral devices connected to an interface card Note these limitations vary widely depending on bus traffic kind of I O and system For explicit information consult Maximum Configurations or other HP published configuration guidelines o Take care that total power consumption of all voltages does not exceed card cage limitations o Terminate SCSI devices as required See SCSI Signal Termination later in this chapter for explanation of SCSI terminators If desired install application software before physically installing the card Use the command usr sbin swinstall and then reboot the system m Warn users in advance that you plan to bring the system down for installation On a multiuser system you can use the wall 1M command Do not connect or disconnect a device while the system is running Do not turn power on or off to a mass storage device connected to a powered up system Doing so could result in data corruption or a system panic Configuring Interface Cards 2 3 Maximum Configur
86. Configuring HP UX for Peripherals HP 9000 L HEWLETT PACKARD HP Part No B2355 90053 Printed in USA January 1995 First Edition E0195 Legal Notices The information in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be held liable for errors contained herein or direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Warranty A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Hewlett Packard product and replacement parts can be obtained from your local Sales and Service Office Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 for DOD agencies and subparagraphs c 1 and c 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 for other agencies HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto California 94304 U S A Use of this manual and flexible disk s or tape cartridge s supplied for this pack is restricted to this product only Additional copies of the programs may be made for security and back up purposes
87. Connect the printer to the card Plug in and power up the printer Set the hardware switches for the printer address Plug in and power on any other peripherals and then the SPU a0 O When the system reboots from the new kernel HP UX detects the printer and associates it with its driver In most instances insf automatically creates the device special files necessary to communicate with the printer although in some cases you will need to create the device special files as a separate operation Two cases configuring a printer to a serial port and guidelines for configuring a non HP printer to a parallel port are documented following this procedure Also refer to Appendix C Major and Minor Numbers for instructions on using mknod to create a custom device special file if needed 5 Invoke usr sbin ioscan fn dprinter_driver again to confirm that the I O subsystem finds the printer and has created the necessary device special files Your output should now resemble that shown in step 3 Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 17 Your next task is to configure the LP spooler to enable you to send print jobs to the printer or plotter See Managing Printers and Printer Output in HP UX System Administration Tasks Creating a Device Special File for a Printer or Plotter Configured to a Serial Port By default insf creates device special files for parallel HP IB and SCSI ports that can be easily associated with
88. IMED INTERFACE CIO Adapter 2 8 0 hpibo CLAIMED INTERFACE printer 2 8 0 5 pro CLAIMED DEVICE HP 256x HP IB Ciper Printer dev diag c8t5d0_lp dev c8t5d0_lp printer 2 8 0 7 pro NO_HW DEVICE HP 256x HP IB Ciper Printer dev diag c8t7d0_lp dev c8t7d0_lp HP UX automatically creates a device file to access the printer except a If you are configuring a printer to a serial port Create the device special file by following the instructions in the section Creating a Device Special File for a Printer or Plotter Configured to a Serial Port a If you are configuring a plotter Force HP UX to recognize the plotter at the new address by following the instructions in Configuring a Plotter or other Non Automatically Configurable Output Devices Using HP UX Commands Next configure the LP spooler to recognize the printer or plotter at its new location by consulting the chapter Managing Printers and Printer Output in the HP UX System Administration Tasks manual 7 28 Configuring Printers and Plotters For Further Information on Printer Related Tasks a HP UX System Administration Tasks Managing Printers and Printer Output to set up the LP spooler SharedPrint UX User and Administrator s Guide HP MPower 1 2 Installation and Configuration HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide HP OpenView OpenSpool documentation The following manpages in the HP UX Reference enable disable 1 Ip 1 Ipstat 1 pr
89. M Drives 4 21 Configuring into your System an LVM Disk Already Containing Data Note This procedure is provided for configuring a Series 800 legacy LVM disk into HP UX 10 0 Before proceeding make sure you have read Planning to Configure into your System a Disk Already Containing Data and have performed the examination documented in Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 1 Back up the data on the disk see the backup chapter in HP UX System Administration Tasks 2 Unmount any file systems residing on the LVM disk by using the umount command 3 Deactivate the disk s volume group by using the vgchange command 4 Remove the volume group of the disk from its current configuration and prepare to export it using the vgexport command The m option creates a mapfile that retains the names of the logical volumes in the volume group usr sbin umount dev vg01 lvol1 usr sbin vgchange a n dev vg01 usr sbin vgexport m mapfile dev vg0l 5 Copy the mapfile to the new system on which the disk will reside On a networked system you can use rep or ftp 6 Create a record of your system s current disk configuration for later use usr sbin ioscan fun C disk 7 Note whether the current configuration includes the device driver needed to communicate with the disk being configured If any necessary driver is 4 22 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives absent from the
90. Physically move the boards 7 Turn the power on and reboot the system As the system boots the new configuration is written to NVM and etc eisa system sci If the devices attached to the board use drivers known to insf for example SCSI devices insf creates device special files for them at their new location If the driver is not known to insf for example if you are installing a custom board use mknod to create any required device special files Consult the documentation accompanying the board and or device for guidance Note If you are moving a network board you need to boot the computer a second time Use shutdown r A 14 EISA Board Configuration Removing an E ISA Board To remove a currently configured E ISA board 1 Invoke sbin eisa_config and at the EISA prompt issue the remove command specifying the slot number from which you are removing a board EISA remove slot After removing all boards desired within eisa_config exit the program Remove the old device file for the board with the rmsf command Warn all users that the system will be brought down Halt the system with the shutdown command and turn off the power Physically remove the boards Turn the power on and reboot the system As the system boots the new configuration is recorded in NVM EISA Board Configuration A 15 Creating Identical E ISA Configurations on Other Workstations If you have several workstations
91. That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system Getting Started 1 15 d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 2 Notify users that the system must be rebooted 3 Shut down and halt the system using the usr sbin shutdown h command a When HALTED you may cycle power appears on the screen turn off the computer and unplug the power cord This is recommended for all devices for SCSI devices and interface cards it is required b Install the peripheral device following directions in the supplied hardware documentation c Power on the peripheral devices and wait for them to signal ready then power on the computer system which will cause your system to reboot As HP UX reboots it will create the device special files required by the ne
92. Uninterruptible Power Systems 8 3 Note Do not use a standard terminal cable to connect a UPS to the serial port The pinouts are different Table 8 1 UPS Cable Pin Outs UPS MUX 9 pins M 25 pins M Receive 1 3 Transmit 2 2 Gnd 9 7 The computer should have one dedicated MUX port for UPS communication for each UPS configured Additional UPS units must be connected to additional dedicated MUX ports Hewlett Packard supports only 25 pin MUX ports for UPS operation The modem port on the MFIO Console LAN pca RJ45 3 pin RS 232 and 5 pin RS 422 MUX ports are not supported for UPS operation For each UPS on the system you are connecting the supplied RS 232 C cable from the UPS to a port on a Modem Distribution Panel MDP The computer console must be configured to port 0 You can connect the UPS to port 1 on the MDP Software Considerations Be sure that you have loaded the PowerTrust UPS fileset UPS TOOLS You can do this using the swinstall command Consult the HP OpenView Software Distributor Administrator s Guide for procedures on loading filesets Note since the connections to the UPS are through power cords and MUX ports ioscan will not explicitly display a UPS in its configuration only the MUX port is displayed 8 4 Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems Selecting Drivers for a UPS Uninterruptable power systems use a serial interface and multiplexer drivers Table 8 2 shows the interfac
93. X Commands Moving a Printer or Plotter For Further Information on Printer Related Tasks For Further Information on Plotter Related Tasks Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems Planning to Configure a UPS Hardware Considerations Cabling Guidelines Software Considerations Selecting Drivers for a UPS Configuring a PowerTrust UPS Lo Configuring UPS to Cycle Power During Non Work Hours After Configuring the PowerTrust UPS Troubleshooting the UPS EISA Board Configuration E ISA Boards and CFG Files Configuring the Software Required by the E ISA Board Configuring E ISA Boards Using Interactive Mode Sample Interactive Session to Add an E ISA Card Starting eisa_config re On Line Help Displaying CFG Files Adding a Board Correcting a Mistake While Using e eisa_ acon Displaying Board Information Loe Changing Choices for Board Functions Exiting eisa_config Displaying Switch and Jumper Settings Saving the Configuration and Exiting eisa_config Setting Switches and Jumpers on an E ISA Interface Board Moving an E ISA Board a Removing an E ISA Board 7 21 7 23 7 24 7 27 7 29 7 30 8 2 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 10 8 12 8 12 A 2 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 6 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 13 A 14 A 15 Contents 5 Creating Identical E ISA Configurations on Other Workstations Troubleshooting E ISA Board Configuration Verifying the Syntax of a CFG File Board Stops Worki
94. Z C2437HA HZ C2438A C2439HA HZ JA JZ C2440HA HZ JA JZ C3032R T C3035R T C3036T C3037U C3050R T C3051R T A3058A A3231A A3232A C3550R T C3551R T C3553RZ C3554U Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 9 Floppy Disk Drive Configuration Guidelines Although floppy disk drives are installed internally the following table is included to ensure that you have the device driver information necessary to access the drive Note that a PC floppy is installed on a Model 712 system while SCSI floppy disk drives are installed on some Series 700 and E class Series 800 computers HP IB floppy disk drives are no longer supported on HP UX See also Considerations for Configuring a Floppy Disk Drive for information about using a floppy disk drive with HP UX Table 4 4 Floppy Disk Drive Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Model 712 internal pefdc dev r floppy c t d pcefloppy Series 700 internal sflop same as above Single Ended SCSI Model E internal disc3 same as above Single Ended SCSI 1 c t d derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the device is attached t is the target SCSI address of the disk device on the interface d is the device unit number See disk 7 2 Specifying disc3 causes target to be included automatically in the
95. _lp c 193 0x000310 Invoke sbin ioscan fn again to display the new device special file whose name will now be consistent with other line printer device special files Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description tty O 56 56 mux2 CLAIMED INTERFACE MUX dev cOp3_Ip You can also confirm the file s characteristics by invoking usr sbin 1lssf on the new file or viewing the long listing 11 usr sbin lssf dev cOp3_l1p mux2 card instance 0 port 3 hardwired at address 56 56 dev cOp3_lp 11 dev cOp3_1p crw rw rw 1 bin i 193 0x000300 Mar 16 18 29 dev cOp3_l1p Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 19 In the minor number 0x000300 shown in the long listing you can see that the 3 corresponds to the port number for the mux2 card at card instance 0 If you have enabled hardware flow control your output will resemble the following usr sbin lssf dev cOp3_lp mux2 card instance 0 port 3 hardwired HW flow control at address 56 56 dev cOp3_l1p 11 dev cOp3_1p crw rw rw 1 bin bin 193 0x000310 Mar 16 18 29 dev cOp3_lp In the minor number 0x000310 shown in the long listing you can see that the 3 corresponds to the port number for the mux2 card at card instance 0 and that bit 27 is set For minor number bit assignments see Appendix C Major and Minor Numbers Your next task will be to configure the LP spooler to enable you to send print jobs to the printer or plotter See Managi
96. a printer or plotter However the device special files insf creates for serial ports ports controlled by asio0 mux0 mux2 and mux4 are named to accommodate terminals more intuitively than printers or plotters To use the serial port for a line printer you should create a new device special file with a line printer name 1 Execute ioscan fn C tty to identify the device file currently associated with the port Note in the following excerpted output the sample device special file representing port 3 has a name consistent with the device file format used by terminals and modems usr sbin ioscan fn C tty H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description mux2 CLAIMED INTERFACE MUX dev ttyOp3 2 Create a new device special for the port to which you are attaching the printer by invoking usr sbin mksf and specifying the device driver d hardware path H and serial port p Use 1 to create a device special file with a line printer name and v for verbose output For example the following command line creates a new device special file for port 3 with a line printer name 7 18 Configuring Printers and Plotters usr sbin mksf d mux2 H 56 56 p3 1 v making cOp3_lp c 193 0x000300 If your manual states that your printer uses hardware flow control RTS CTS and you wish to employ it you can execute mksf with the f option to enable the feature usr sbin mksf d mux2 H 56 56 p3 f 1 v making cOp3
97. a terminator installed on its second connector The terminator is or acts as a small resistor that provides matching impedance on the bus circuit Without such termination data traveling on the bus is likely to be corrupted and the protocol upset to the point that it hangs the bus Some devices particularly host adapters contain internal SCSI bus terminators or require special terminators If two devices supply termination power locate them at each end of the SCSI bus Refer to the specific hardware manuals of host adapters and the devices on the bus for instructions on how to prevent excessive or improper SCSI bus termination Caution Only the two ends of a SCSI bus should be terminated Excessive or improper termination overloads the SCSI port s termination power TERMPWR circuitry This can result in blowing the TERMPWR fuse on the adapter or damaging transceivers on any attached device including the adapter All HP SCSI products are shipped with appropriate terminators Table 2 17 might be helpful if you need to order additional termination Table 2 17 SCSI Terminators Part Number Kind of Terminator No Pins Application C2904A high density w thumb screw 50 Active SCSLII C2905A high density w thumb screw 68 Active SCSLIHI K2290 low density w thumb screw 50 Passive SCSI II K2291 low density w bail connector 50 Passive SCSI II wide mouth Configuring Interface Cards 2 27
98. agneto optical library system you will need to create device files for the remaining slots To do so execute the following command usr sbin insf e p lt first_optical disk last_optical disk gt H lt H W_path gt 9 Verify the configuration by invoking the ioscan command on the address to which the disk library was configured As shown in excerpted output run on a Series 700 a magneto optical autochanger displays two entries one for the autochanger mechanism in this case C1708C and one for the disk mechanism C1716C each with its own set of block and character device special files Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 5 9 usr sbin ioscan H 2 0 1 fn I H W Path 2 0 1 2 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 Driver usr sbin ioscan H 2 0 1 1 0 fn Class I H W Path O 2 0 1 1 0 S W State c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in SCSI target CLAIMED DEVICE schgr CLAIMED DEVICE HP c1708C dev ac cOt0d0_10a dev rac cOt0d0_10a dev ac cOt0d0_10b dev rac cOt0d0_10b dev ac cOt0d0O_11a dev rac cOt0Od0_ila dev ac cOt0d0_11b dev rac cOt0d0_11b dev ac cOt0d0_12a dev rac cOt0d0_12a dev ac cOt0d0_31b dev rac cOt0d0_31b dev ac cOt0d0_32a dev rac cOt0d0_32a dev ac cOt0d0_32b dev rac cOt0d0_32b dev rac cOt0do Driver S W State H W Type Description sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE HP C1716C dev dsk cOt1do dev rdsk c0t1d0 5 10 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices After Configuring a Magneto Optical Device
99. an3 CLAIMED 2 52 scsi3 CLAIMED 2 52 2 0 disc3 CLAIMED 2 52 3 0 disc3 CLAIMED 2 52 4 0 disc3 CLAIMED 2 52 5 0 disc3 CLAIMED 16 memory CLAIMED 18 boot_console CLAIMED 24 memory CLAIMED 32 memory CLAIMED 36 memory CLAIMED 48 processor CLAIMED 49 processor CLAIMED 52 processor CLAIMED 53 processor CLAIMED 56 processor CLAIMED 57 processor CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS INTERFACE INTERFACE DEVICE DEVICE INTERFACE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE INTERFACE BUS_NEXUS INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE DEVICE MEMORY BUS_NEXUS MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSOR Bus Converter HP J2092A 16 RS 232 MUX HP Fast Wide SCSI Interface HP C2430D SCSI Disk HP C2430D SCSI Disk HP 28615A HP FL Interface HP FL Disk HP 2251 HP FL Disk HP 2251 HP FL Disk HP 2251 HP FL Disk LAN Console HP 286554 SCSI Interface HP C1716C SCSI Disk HP C2247 SCSI Disk HP C2247 SCSI Disk TOSHIBA CD ROM SCSI Tape HP C2247 SCSI Disk HP C2247 SCSI Disk HP 28655A Parallel Interface Bus Converter HP J2146A 802 3 LAN HP Fast Wide SCSI Interface HP C2247WD SCSI Disk HP C2247WD SCSI Disk HP C2247WD SCSI Disk HP C2247WD SCSI Disk Memory Console Memory Memory Memory Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Figu
100. apabilities standard to full featured HP terminal firmware See Limitations to Non HP Terminal Emulation for information on the differences Planning to Configure a Port for a Modem To add a modem to an HP system you need to configure both the serial port for HP UX to recognize the modem and the modem s protocol Regardless of whether you configure using SAM recommended or HP UX command line interface read the procedure and modem documentation beforehand Consider the following choices m The hardware path including port number of the serial interface to be used by the modem You can identify potential ports by invoking usr sbin ioscan C tty or list dev ttyzp where x is the mux card instance and p shows all existing ports a The modem s baud rate m Whether the modem will be used for outgoing calls a Whether the modem will receive incoming calls m Whether the modem requires CCITT required only by certain European government protocols For standard Hayes compatible modems that use CCITT modulation and compression standards do not use CCITT mode Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 3 See modem 7 for details of RS 232 C signaling characteristic of simple and CCITT modems a Whether you need to configure for UUCP connectivity You will need to create device special files with usr sbin mksf specifically for modem use mksf provides options for CCITT for special European protocol requirements most US custo
101. ard and floppy disk drives and disk arrays to HP IB HP FL and SCSI interfaces Procedures 4 and guidelines are also provided for configuring CD ROM drives to HP IB and SCSI interfaces When configuring a disk drive disk array or CD ROM drive have available the following additional documentation a HP UX System Administration Tasks m HP UX Reference m Pertinent hardware documentation for the computer device adapter and peripheral device m Record of your disk configuration Note You can use usr sbin ioscan C disk to identify disks configured on your system You can use usr sbin diskinfo to find out disk characteristics Once you have configured a disk and are creating a file system HP UX uses the correct disk geometry without requiring you to cite an explicit etc disktab entry For backward compatibility you can still consult etc disktab for disk geometry information on older disks Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 1 Planning to Configure a Disk Drive Review the material discussed in this chapter for each kind of disk drive Identify the device driver s that must be present in the kernel for the interface and disk device you are installing You will find the device drivers listed in Selecting Device Drivers for a Disk Device and Interface Once you have planned your disk configuration proceed to the section Configuring HP UX for a New Disk Device Performance O
102. ards will not be recognized Call your HP representative A 22 EISA Board Configuration Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action slot_num Slot EISA Expander Initialized eisa_id This informational message indicates that the bus adapter located between the EISA bus and the host system bus initialized properly It also indicates how many slots the kernel is configured to recognize None EISA SLOT slot_num This informational message indicates which slot is currently being initialized When successful each driver displays its own initialization message For example EISA SLOT 1 driver_specific_message None Successfully Initialized EISA Boot Device The system recognized a special case If the system boots from EISA SCSI before EISA SCSI configuration information is stored in NVM the processor dependent code uses default configuration data that might conflict with other EISA cards in the system To handle this the system ignores all cards except the boot EISA SCSI during the first power up and continues a limited boot If eisa_config run in sbin bcheckrc can create a valid configuration it records it in NVM and the system sci file and the system is automatically rebooted If a valid configuration cannot be created eisa_config issues an error message the system comes up with the other cards unusable In this case you can run eisa_config
103. are listed for reference only 5 Specifying lpr2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Note Neither Series 700 EISA nor Series 800 CIO architectures support a parallel interface Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 11 Table 7 6 Parallel Plotter Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Device Drivers Default Device File Series 700 Core I O internal CentIf2 dev c t d0_1p Series 800 HP PB 28655A4 lpr2 same as above 1 The following plotter models can be configured to the Series 700 parallel interface 7440A C1631A C2859A C1620A C1633A C3170A C1625A C2847A C3171A C1627A C2848A C3180A C1629A C2858A C3181A 2 Specifying CentIf causes CharDrv to be included in the kernel 3 c t d derives from the hardware path as shown in ioscan output c is the card instance of the ext_bus class of interface card to which the plotter is attached t is the target number d is the device number 4 The following plotter models can be configured to the Series 800 HP PB parallel interface 7550B C1600A C1601A C1620A C1625A C1627A 5 Specifying lpr2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Note Neither Series 700 EISA nor Series 800 CIO architectures support a parallel interface 7 12 Configuring Printers and Plotters Guidelines for Configuring a Printer to a SCSI Interface Table 7 7 SCSI
104. ated with the INTERFACE hardware type usr sbin ioscan C ext_bus f H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus CLAIMED INTERFACE F W SCSI ext_bus 2 8 12 0 Cent If CLAIMED INTERFACE Parallel Interface ext_bus i 8 12 5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE SCSI The card instance number is assigned by the operating system to the interface card and reflects the order ioconfig binds that class of interface card to its driver when it boots Instance is stored in two files etc ioconfig and stand ioconfig These files retain their information across reboots unless one is corrupted or missing in which case ioinit will rebuild the entire dev structure If this occurs you would have to recreate any customized permissions or files For further explanation of card instance read the white paper entitled HP UX 10 0 Device File Naming Convention 1 12 Getting Started An Example Showing Correlation Between Card Instance and Device Files Figure 1 5 shows ioscan output taken from a Model 735 The shaded numbers show how card instance number and hardware path elements map directly into the device special file dev dsk cit5d0 as card instance target number and device number Typically the card instance maps as the digit after the letter c or for terminals the number after tty Note the card instance designated in the device special file refers to the interface card not to the instance number of the peripheral device attache
105. ation Guidelines This section gives information pertinent to configuring a magneto optical disk library If you are configuring a single magneto optical disk refer to the previous section Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Guidelines Table 5 3 lists the device drivers required to configure a magneto optical disk library to a single ended SCSI interface for each supported architecture Table 5 3 Magneto Optical Disk Library Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device Files Series 700 internal ssrfc dev rlac c t d _ alb 4 core I O only schgr sdisk Series 800 CIO 27147A scsi2 same as above ssrfc autox0 disc3 Series 800 HP PB 28655A scsit same as above ssrfc autox0 disc3 1 The following optical disk libraries are supported on Series 700 core single ended SCSI only and Series 800 HP PB buses C1100A C1150A C1160A C1170A C1700C T C1704A C T C1705A C T C1708C T 2 Disks in an optical disk library must be accessed through the ssrfc driver they cannot be accessed directly through the SCSI disk driver sdisk or disc3 Also see autochanger 7 3 Specifying schgr or sdisk causes sctl c700 and wsio to be included in the kernel 4 c t d derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the class of interface card to which the device is attached t is the address of the device on the interface
106. ations Depending on interface multiple peripheral devices can be connected to any interface card However because maximum device connections are device and platform dependent the following information represents basic guidelines only For detailed information contact an HP Customer Engineer or field office which should have access to recent information published in the HP 9000 configuration and price guides Table 2 1 Maximum Recommended Device Connections by Interface Type of Maximum Devices Maximum Interface per Card Cabling HP IB Varies 20m SCSI 7 6m Single Ended SCSI 7 25m Differential SCSI 15 25m Fast Wide HP FL 8 see note 1 Depending on type of peripheral device HP IB electrical specification permits up to 14 devices connected simultaneously Devices requiring parallel polling protocol require use of addresses 0 7 only Instruments can use addresses 0 29 2 Including internal cable length 3 P bus electrical cables limit intra device distances a maximum of 500m fiber optic cable can connect devices to the server 2 4 Configuring Interface Cards Selecting Device Drivers for Your Interface Cards The following sections describe each interface and their connectivity to peripherals Asynchronous Data Communication Configuration Guidelines HP UX multiplexers provide asynchronous data communication using protocols RS 232 C RS 422 or RS 423 depending on th
107. board Refer to Changing Choices for Board Functions If your desired board configuration still causes conflicts you may not be able to use certain boards together Some configurations are simply not possible for example two boards from different manufacturers may both require the same resource If this happens only one of the boards can be used EISA Board Configuration A 19 Two CFG Files Have the Same Name If you want to load a CFG file into the sbin lib eisa directory that has the same name as a file already in that directory follow these steps 1 Load the new CFG file from media into a temporary directory 2 Rename the CFG file using the same syntax as described in E ISA Boards and CFG Files at the beginning of this appendix In the temporary directory type the following command mv oldname newname 3 Move the renamed CFG file to the sbin lib eisa directory Type the following command mv i newname sbin lib eisa Boards that have duplicate CFG file names must be added using eisa_config interactively see Configuring E ISA Boards Using Interactive Mode earlier A 20 EISA Board Configuration E ISA Board Power Up Messages This section contains a listing of E ISA board power up messages their potential cause and action you can take to correct the problem Several messages displayed are informational only They indicate that configuration completed successfully Message
108. can be manually started by executing usr lbin ups_mond f etc ups_conf m Make sure that the UPS messages are displayed on the console m Check for UPS messages in usr adm syslog or the files to which they are redirected Although the PowerTrust UPS is hardware it displays in ioscan output only as a terminal port Its monitoring daemon ups_mond is a program that reads and writes through that port Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems 8 11 After Configuring the PowerTrust UPS If adding any card or peripheral to a unit monitored by a UPS you need to recalculate the voltage amperage VA draw Regardless of how many PowerTrust UPS devices are installed only one instance of the ups_mond daemon should be running at any time If you are running SupportWatch you should include usr adm syslog among those files it monitors in addition to usr bin dmesg and usr adm diag A special circumstance should be noted for systems with external bus extenders covered by a PowerTrust UPS If for any reason a disk in an external bus extender loses power but the SPU to which it is configured does not you must wait the length of time for shutdown_timeout_mins before cycling power to the SPU Troubleshooting the UPS Error messages generated by the UPS are documented on the ups_mond 1M manpage 8 12 Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems A EISA Board Configuration Before you can make use of EISA and ISA I O board
109. ce driver as documented in Chapter 2 c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system 7 16 Configuring Printers and Plotters mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix f If your printer installation also requires that you install an E ISA card you need to run eisa_config at this time to configure the EISA or ISA bus Consult Appendix A EISA Configuration of this manual for tutorial and procedures and etsa_config 1M in the HP UX Reference 4 Once the software configuration is complete bring down the system with sufficient grace period to allow users to exit their files You can execute usr sbin shutdown r or usr sbin reboot If you have to install an interface card bring the system to a complete halt that is use usr sbin shutdown h or usr sbin reboot h See shutdown 1M or reboot 1M in the HP UX Reference a Power off and unplug all peripherals then the SPU b Install the hardware as described in the manual accompanying the card and printer
110. ce card port number Hardware address Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers LVM physical volume volume group RAID level use Worksheets D 5 Tape Drives Part name number type of tape drive Serial number Firmware Revision Capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Cabling Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers Use Part name number type of tape drive Serial number Firmware Revision Capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Cabling Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers Use D 6 Worksheets Printers and Plotters Part name number Serial number Firmware Revision Capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Cabling Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers Means of access Part name number Serial number Firmware Revision Capacity Interface card port number Hardware address Cabling Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers Means of access Worksheets D 7 Uninterruptible Power Systems UPS Part name number Serial number Firmware Rev
111. ch is documented in the HP UX System Administration Tasks manual Configuring a disk already containing data into HP UX 10 0 requires some attention to detail because the I O system is largely converged and the HP UX file system layout that is the locations of system files and directories has changed Approach the task in two stages 1 Examine the files and data on the disk for possible clashes with the HP UX 10 0 and take the necessary precautions as documented in Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 the next section 2 Configure the disk into HP 10 0 Once 9 x Series 700 whole disks and Series 800 disks with hard partitions are successfully configured HP UX 10 0 accesses their data using a compatibility pseudo driver cpd 4 14 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 Before you configure a disk containing 9 2 data to a 10 0 system it is essential that you make sure you will not be introducing file system inconsistencies This precaution is necessary because the file system layout has changed dramatically from HP UX 9 2 to 10 0 Former system files and device files will not work in the new operating system and might cause serious problems if they are used The new file system hierarchy is based on AT amp T V 4 and OSF 1 The organization of files and directories are explained in a white paper entitled HP UX 10 0 File System Layout 4 To ensure against inc
112. chanism form factor and capacity Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 37 After Configuring HP UX for the Disk Device After configuring HP UX for a disk device you may complete the tasks required to put it to use These include Setting up powerfail capabilities for the disk or disk array Setting up or modifying RAID levels for a disk array if necessary Adding a disk to an LVM volume group Mirroring the disk Defining logical volumes in LVM Making the disk available for swapping Creating or moving file systems onto the disk Exporting the disk using NFS capabilities Controlling access to the information on the disk Controlling disk usage by implementing disk quotas Integrating the disk into your backup strategy Restoring data to the disk from other disks Moving file systems to more equitably use your disk space Arrange to mount file systems on the disk at bootup Creating a recovery system for the data on the disk particularly if this is the root disk For these tasks refer to information in the hardware manuals HP UX System Administration Tasks manual and the HP UX Reference 4 38 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Configuring Magneto Optical Devices Magneto optical disks and magneto optical disk library systems are SCSI devices used for high capacity read write applications The ability of magneto optical devices to randomly access vast amounts of data mak
113. compression but you need to read it on a tape drive that does not support data compression you must create the tape using a device special file with data compression disabled using mksf See Creating Customized Device Special Files for Tape Devices later in this chapter for an example Table 6 3 shows the configuration requirements for the single ended SCSI tape drives Configuring Tape Drives 6 5 Table 6 3 SCSI Tape Drive Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device Special Files Series 700 Core I O internal stape dev rmt c t d BEST Lb n nb dev rmt c t d t i bIn nb dev rmt m b n nb Series 700 EISA 25525A B stape same as above Series 800 CIO 2714TA scsi2 same as above tape2 Series 800 HP PB 28655A scsil same as above tape2 1 The following tape drives are supported for HP UX on a single ended SCSI interface 7980S SX A2311A A2656A A2944A A2044A A3024A C1502A C1503A B C C1504A B C C1512A C1520A B C1521B C1530B C1533A C1534A C1535A C1553A C2292A C2297T U C2298A C2463F R C2464F R C2465R C2466F R C2467F R C2477F R S U C2478U C2954A Obsolete models are shown in parenthesis for reference only 2 Specifying stape causes sctl c700 wsio and core drivers to be included automatically in the kernel 3 Naming convention for systems installed with long file names
114. contents of non volatile memory As EISA comes up it will complain that NVM data is missing for cards that identify themselves eisa_config running from etc bcheckre will automatically generate data for and reconfigure the EISA cards that are present You will need to reconfigure ISA cards by running eisa_config interactively Follow instructions in Configuring E ISA Boards Using Interactive Mode Bus Architectures This Appendix contains a sampling of HP bus architecture diagrams In some cases ioscan output is provided to help you associate the hardware configuration and the software display Addressing on a typical multi function personality card is also explained Bus Architectures B 1 Series 700 Bus Architecture Since its initial introduction the Series 700 has grown enormously in breadth and configurability The figures shown illustrate the Series 700 configured as a workstation although Model 735 can be configured to support additional 735 or 755 workstations as a cluster server The Model 770 features multiple GSC buses for versatility and I O efficiency B 2 Bus Architectures Model 712 Figure B 1 shows the Model 712 bus diagram which has capability for up to 2 graphics cards and 2 graphics monitors which show up on ioscan as 0 and 1 Core I O descends from slot 2 off the system bus and optional cards show up as slots 5 or 6 Optional cards include support for IBM TokenRing LAN X 25 seria
115. correctly by executing the nm command and greping for the driver name The command string should return at least one entry such as that shown below usr ccs bin nm vmunix_test grep disco disco_install 524264 externlentry CODE C 14 Major and Minor Numbers g Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev h Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix Notify users that the system must be rebooted Shut down and halt the system using the usr sbin shutdown h command Turn off power to the SPU Install the peripheral device Make sure the peripheral s hardware address is set to the hardware path specified in the driver statement of the stand systen file Power up the peripheral device and then the SPU When the kernel reboots you can verify that the custom driver was configured into the kernel by executing usr sbin ioscan f You should see the driver associated with its intended device at the hardware path you specified in step 2 For further information on driver statements and other customizations of the stand system file consult the config 1M manpage The config program is used by mk_k
116. ct your plotter noting the hardware address to which you are connecting it and the HP IB address to which you are setting the plotter In this example we are configuring an HP 7596A Draftmaster II to an HP IB interface located in card cage slot 12 in a Model 806 computer The HP IB address is set to 5 2 Identify the hardware path to the plotter by invoking ioscan An excerpt of the output might resemble the following asr sbin ioscan f Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description be 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS be 1 56 be CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Bus Converter ext_bus 1 56 40 hpf11 CLAIMED INTERFACE HP 28615A HP FL Interface lanmux 0 56 44 lanmux0 CLAIMED INTERFACE HP J2146A 802 3 LAN lan 1 56 44 1 lan3 CLAIMED INTERFACE ext_bus 2 656 48 hpibi CLAIMED INTERFACE HP 28650B HP IB Interface The interface driver is hpib1 and the hardware path of interface card to which the plotter is connected is 56 48 hardware path equals slot number times four the bus converter is in slot 14 the interface card is in slot 12 Neither the HP IB address of the plotter nor the instrO device driver is shown 3 Rebuild the kernel to include the instrO driver Here is how to do so 7 24 Configuring Printers and Plotters Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel and writes a system file in your current dire
117. ctory That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command which compiles the kernel and loads it mk_kernel creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 25 4 Reboot the system by invoking the shutdown command with sufficient grace period to allow users to exit their files before the system goes down See shutdown 1M in the HP UX Reference 5 Bind the software driver used by the plotter instr0 to the plotter s full hardware path 56 48 5 by executing usr sbin ioscan with the M and H options Then verify the results by executing ioscan again As shown in the following sequence of commands and ioscan output the device driver instr0 associates with a peripheral device at address 56 48 5 The instro driver cannot
118. d off 1 Create a crontab file containing the following entries The first entry applies to Monday through Thursday and the second entry applies to Friday 30 17 1 4 power_onoff 7 30 tomorrow 30 17 x 5 power_onoff 7 30 Monday This tells cron to execute power_onoff at 5 30pm Monday through Friday power_onoff executes shutdown h 60 immediately The arguments to power_onoff tell ups_mond when to cycle power back on You can specify an increment to power_onoff of up to four days 99 9 hours in advance 2 Once running ups_mond logs status messages using syslogd the system logging daemon You can configure syslogd to redirect these messages where appropriate Refer to the syslogd 1M manpage for details For example you can add these lines to etc syslog conf 8 10 Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems Log report messages from the ups_mond daemon info usr adm daemon_log daemon err usr adm daemon_log daemon emerg dev console daemon emerg hostname Log messages from power_onoff user err usr adm user_log Once these lines are added to etc syslog conf syslogd must be set to accept the changes Execute kill HUP cat etc syslog pid and restart ups_mond 3 Verify that HP UX has been properly configured for the PowerTrust UPS as follows m Check to make sure the UPS monitor daemon ups_mond is running by executing ps ef grep ups This process is started at bootup by etc inittab and
119. d f etc ups_conf b Add a comment sign in front of the getty entry corresponding to the port used by the UPS For example ttp1 2 respawn usr sbin getty h ttyOp1 9600 Edit the etc ups_conf file to customize the UPS configuration for your system The etc ups_conf file informs the monitoring daemon usr 1bin ups_mond which ports to monitor and how to react to UPS status The ups_conf 4 manpage documents the required format and available options Also read carefully Figure 8 3 on the next page shutdown_delay_mins 1 shutdown_timeout_mins 5 upstty dev tty0p1 upstty dev tty0p2 MSG_ONLY Figure 8 2 A Sample etc ups_conf File Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems 8 7 a To ensure that the UPS operates appropriately to your system review carefully the guidelines listed below concerning how to set shutdown_delay_mins and shutdown_timeout_mins in the etc ups_conf file shutdown_delay_mins one minute by default is the number of minutes after loss of AC power is detected before HP UX invokes shutdown h Increase this value if the site commonly experiences momentary power interruptions greater than one minute for which recovery of power is expected On a large system do not set the shutdown_delay_mins to a value larger than nine minutes HP guarantees the UPS to provide output power for up to fifteen minutes Large systems may take as long as five minutes to complete shutdown plux one minute for the shutd
120. d to the card Ignore those numbers This is a departure from the LU concept of previous HP UX Series 800 releases LU numbers were similar to device instance numbers and are not used The card instance number is unique only for the specific class in this case ext_bus of interface Thus for example the tty class of interface has its own sequence of card instance numbers beginning with zero which appear in its device files asr sbin ioscan fn H 2 0 7 I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description 1 2 0 7 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in F W SCSI 3 2 0 7 5 target CLATMED DEVICE 2 2 0 7 5 0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE dev dsk cit5d0 dev rdsk c1t5do Figure 1 5 Device Special File in Relation to Hardware Path and Instance Getting Started 1 13 Identifying Device Special Files Associated with a Peripheral Device You can use ioscan fn or fkn or fun to show device special file names associated with a peripheral You can also add other ioscan options such as H C d or I to limit your output to specific elements in your configuration The following example using C tape shows the device files available for tape class as well as the location and type of tape device Note too the new tape device file naming convention These are explained in Chapter 6 Configuring Tape Drives and on the mt 7 manpage usr sbin ioscan fn C tape Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description O 56 52 0 0
121. d commands for proper functioning of your modem However note the following information specific to HP UX 3 The modem should not ignore DTR but instead autoanswer when HP computer raises DTR Modem should hang up the line disable autoanswer and return to command state when computer drops DTR This is AT amp D2 on Hayes modem protocol Do not have the modem do power on reset when DTR is dropped as some modems temporarily raise CD during reset On Hayes modems do not use AT amp D3 Modem should assert carrier detect only when there is a carrier and should drop CD when carrier is lost This is AT amp C1 on Hayes modem Modem should pass through BREAK because the BREAK key is used for the interrupt signal as well as for baud rate switching Modem speed between modem and terminal should be known however speed can be negotiated in modem to modem connections using the modems autobauding speed detection Initially features such as hardware flow control CTS RTS and error correct should be turned off Once you have established that the modem communicates properly add these features one at a time If modems connect but no data appears turn off all compression reliability MNP PEP LAP and other advanced features Set the modem as simply as possible Once working add the advanced features Do not use CCITT control signals on modem or HP computer Note that this does not affect the modem use of CCITT modulation or compres
122. d parallel polling that requires they be configured to addresses in the range of 0 to 7 Performance might decline if more than four tape devices are connected to an HP IB interface Do not install HP IB tape drives to the same interface as the root device main disk drive particularly on Series 800 CIO servers Doing so can severely degrade your disk drive s performance Table 6 1 lists the drivers required for configuring an HP IB tape drive for each supported architecture It also shows the device special files that insf creates when tape devices are configured 6 2 Configuring Tape Drives Table 6 1 HP IB Tape Drive Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device Special Files Series 800 CIO 27110B hpibo dev rmt c t d BEST bln nb tape1 dev rmt c t a f i o n nb dev rmt m b n nb Series 800 HP PB 28650B hpib1 same as above tapel 1 The following model tape drives are supported for HP UX on the Series 800 CIO and HP PB HP IB interfaces 7980A XC C1511A Models shown in parenthesis are obsolete and are listed for reference only 2 Specifying hpibO causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included automatically in the kernel 3 Naming convention for systems installed with long file names c t d derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the tape drive is attached t is
123. e Aux Data Stop bits 8 1 Aux Xmt Handshake None Parity None XPC Handshake Off Aux Parity None Misc Block End us cr Auto Page Off TVI 955 Attribute No Space VPGO BIk End None Labels Off Save Labels Off Page Edit Off WPRT Intensity Normal WPRT Reverse Off WPRT Underline Off Test Off Tabs Tabs undefined Answerback Answerback blank FKeys All FKeys definition undefined FKey Labels All FKey labels undefined Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 19 Limitations to Non HP Terminal Emulation Non HP terminal support has limitations to usage particularly in the area of keyboard differences Observe the following a The CUE startup screen will work with non HP terminals only if the T option is used with cuegetty see cue 1 and cuegetty 1M in the HP UX Reference a All HP terminals use screen buffers for the page up Prev and page down Next functions Non HP terminals and terminal emulations do not provide these keys they rely on applications to handle them Wyse 60 Emulation Limitations a The Wyse 60 overloads the meaning of various ASCII control characters As a result the behavior of some control characters may not be as the user expects m Use the DEL key located next to Backspace to backspace If using HP 700 60 with a PC AT keyboard in Wyse60 mode the DEL key is located in the bottom row of the number pad m Unlike HP terminals which provide two lines Wyse 60 terminals provid
124. e active volume groups When moving an LVM disk most of your 4 34 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 10 LVM commands will be based on the volume group to which the disk belongs b Execute lvdisplay v for every logical volume in the volume group of the disk being removed to locate any logical volumes currently straddling the disk being moved and another disk If you find any m Back up the data and remove the logical volume by executing an lvremove command Or if the logical volume is mirrored m Remove the mirroring by executing an lvreduce m 0 command 4 c Execute a vgchange command to deactivate the volume group to which the disk is being added d If the disk comprises an entire volume group execute a vgexport command to remove it from the current configuration If the disk comprises a portion of a volume group execute a vgreduce command The disk can now free be removed Notify the users on the system about system shutdown as a result of removing the disk drive Shut down and bring your system into single user mode using the shutdown command If you are removing the disk drive your kernel uses for primary swap and dump reconfigure the kernel to reassign them Refer to the file systems chapter of the System Administration Tasks Halt the system usr sbin reboot h Turn off any peripherals attached to the computer system and then the SPU Turn off unp
125. e special file created for the new LVM disk You can also identify the disk device by using the ioscan command usr sbin ioscan fn C disk will display all disks and their device special files Or you can use usr sbin ioscan H hardware_path fn to identify the disk device by location Scan your current system to identify all disks by their volume groups usr sbin vgscan v Create a directory for the volume group to which the new LVM disk will belong For example a new volume group might be called vg06 mkdir dev vg06 Check to make sure that you are creating a unique minor number for the new group file Then create a character device special file for the new volume group s group file The character major number for LVM is 64 In the minor number n must be in the range between O and 9 because the maximum number of volume groups by default allowed on a system is ten You can increase the number by changing the operating system parameter maxvgs in usr conf master d core hpux or by using SAM 11 dev group mknod dev vg06 group c 64 0x0n0000 4 24 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 14 Import the LVM disk to the current system citing the the block device 15 16 special file name you noted when the system booted up and the mapfile you created when invoking vgexport at the beginning of the procedure You can preview the effect of the import by using the p option vgimport
126. e 3 4 Unique Definitions of VT100 Keys Key Meaning Backspace Sends Delete character octal 177 instead of Backspace Alt Char Escape Er Line New Line or Line Feed F1 F5 Consult DEC manual for captive meanings E6 Inter Halt Inoperative in vt100 mode E7 Resume Fs Cancel F9 Main Screen F10 Exit EA Remove ai 3 16 Configuring Terminals and Modems Using an HP 700 60 Terminal in DEC Mode If you have reason to use an HP 700 60 terminal in DEC emulation mode you might wish to change the operation of the Backspace key You can do so by using the HP 700 60 terminal s set up menu 1 Enter the Setup menu and proceed to the Keyboard Configuration menu Set the Backspace key from Delete to Backspace 2 3 Save the Keyboard Configuration 4 Log out then log back in again Your keyboard will now be set to erase characters correctly By default the backspace key on both DEC terminals and emulation is configured as DEL echoes on the screen and does not erase To set the key to erase execute an stty command as follows Input the and characters as separate keystrokes and be sure to enclose them in quotation marks HP 700 60 terminals in VT320 mode uses control H for backspace You can set this up in your profile or login file Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 17 Configuring the Wyse 60 Terminal Configure the Wyse 60 terminal for u
127. e a static free workstation HP part number 9300 0933 ao Use a grounding wrist strap when handling the interface card o Handle the card only by its non connector edges faceplate bulkhead or extractor levers o If necessary store interface cards and device adapters in their original shipping containers or equivalent anti static packaging The storage area should be clean dry and free of corrosive elements m Create a detailed record of your configuration 2 2 Use a worksheet in the back of this book to record the data provided on the stickers attached to the card If problems arise the codes provide service engineers with manufacturing version The following information typically appears on the stickers m Part number m Version and date encoded in a five digit alphanumeric string m Serial number encoded in a ten digit alphanumeric string m Other production identification information o Record the firmware revision of the interface card Record the link level address for the processor It comes with the shipping The usr sbin lanadmin command reports back the station address o Record any dip switches or address settings you make on any cards or external devices co Keep a current copy of output from usr sbin ioscan f for a total picture of your system s configuration including use of hardware slots and configured device drivers Configuring Interface Cards Note The HP Precision Bus HP P
128. e a single line to display softkey labels Sometimes this may result in truncated softkey labels For example the Help on Context label for F1 might appear as Help on C DEC VT Series Limitations a Two different kinds of keyboards are available for DEC terminals a DEC ANSI keyboard with programmable function PF keys and a PC AT keyboard which does not provide programmable function keys The function keys F1 through F4 on the DEC ANSI keyboard are preassigned Different keys are used for its programmable function PF keys Certain applications such as Dialog Manager based applications will remap some of the keys Other commands may or may not have any keyboard remapping The DEC PC AT keyboard does not provide PF1 PF2 PF3 or PF4 keys PF4 can be mapped on a DEC PC AT keyboard to the key 3 20 Configuring Terminals and Modems Table 3 6 compares use of function keys on the DEC ANSI keyboard DEC PC AT keyboard and an HP keyboard Function keys on Wyse keyboards are consistent with HP keyboards Table 3 6 Function Key Mappings HP DEC ANSI keyboard DEC ANSI keyboard DEC PC AT or in VT100 in VT320 keyboard Wyse60 or or HP700 60 HP700 60 in VT100 mode in VT320 mode Fl PF2 PF2 key F2 PF1 PF1 NumLock F3 space bar space bar space bar F4 PF3 PF3 key F5 return F10 exit F5 F6 none none none F7 none F18 first unlabeled key to right of Pause Break F8 none
129. e board using automatic mode check etc eisa config err for error messages 2 Did you add the required drivers to the HP UX kernel If not see Configuring the Software Required by the E ISA Board 3 If you added the board interactively did you save the new configuration before exiting eisa_config If not run eisa_config again add the board again and then save the configuration See Saving the Configuration and Exiting eisa_config 4 Did you change any switch and jumper settings to match the settings specified in etc eisa config log If so verify that you did so accurately 5 Did you reboot the system after changing the configuration interactively If not reboot the system taking care to warn users first 6 Did you create the necessary device special files correctly For HP supplied boards insf will have created the necessary device special files for any attached devices on rebooting For boards supplied by a different manufacturer refer to the documentation shipped with your board If the driver is not known to insf use mknod to create any required device special files Board Configuration Conflicts E ISA boards use four types of resources interrupt lines DMA channels register addresses and memory If the automatic mode of eisa_config cannot configure a board due to resource conflicts you may still be able to use eisa_config interactively to add a board that had a conflict or to change choices for a new
130. e card All HP UX computers are equipped with RS 232 C serial ports Additional serial cards increase the number of connections possible between the SPU and terminals modems printers and uninterruptable power system UPS Table 2 2 summarizes the scope of HP cards architecture and drivers available It also identifies the distribution panels available for each serial card Configuring Interface Cards 2 5 Table 2 2 Multiplexer Connectivity Configuration Requirements Models E F G H I Card Ports Protocol Architecture Device Drivers Available Distribution Panels internal 2 port MUX Series 700 asioO none RS 232 C 98190A 16 port MUX Series 800 muxo ADP 5062 3070 RS 232 C CIO 28639 50001 2port MUX Models 890 T500 mux43 none 40299B 8 port MUX Series 800 mux2 gt ADP 5062 3070 RS 232 C or RS 4224 HP PB ADP 422 5062 3085 J2092A 16 port HP PB mux2 gt DDP 5062 3066 RS 232 C6 DDP 5181 2085 RJ45 0950 2431 J2093A 32 port MUX HP PB mux2 gt DDP 5062 3066 RS423 or RS422 DDP 5181 2085 RJ45 0950 2431 J2094A 16 port MUX HP PB mux2 gt MDP 5062 3054 RS 232 C8 JZ2096A 32 port MUX HP PB mux2 gt DDP 5062 3066 RS 232 C6 DDP 5181 2085 RJ45 0950 2431 A1703 60003 2 port MUX Series 800 mux4 none Models F G H I A1703 60022 16 port MUXI Series 800 mux2 gt MDP 5062 3054 DDP 5062 3066 DDP 5181 2085 1 Specifying mux0 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 2 The t
131. e configuring the UPS Under virtually all circumstances the interface driver used by the UPS is already present in the kernel 2 Invoke ioscan for the tty class to display the hardware path driver and device special file s available for the UPS Your output might resemble the following usr sbin ioscan fun C tty Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description tty O 56 0 mux4 CLAIMED INTERFACE dev ttyOpo dev ttyOp1 In this simplified example from a Model 887 the multiplexer card is installed in slot 14 H W Path divided by 4 and bound with the mux4 device driver Device special files dev ttyOp0 and dev tty0p1 are available If an MDP or DDP is installed at the MUX port ioscan will show device special files for all the ports available As shipped the console is configured to be plugged in at port 0 The dev console file is equivalent to dev ttyOp0 Thus in this example Port 1 represented by dev ttyOp1 can be used for the UPS 3 Edit the etc inittab file to activate the UPS monitoring daemon when the system boots up To do so a Remove the comment sign from the UPS entry Be sure the ups entry appears after the sbin rce entry so that the ups_mond is started after the system logging daemon syslogd Note the UPS is started with real time priority so that it does not get starved on a busy system 8 6 Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems ups respawn rtprio O usr lbin ups_mon
132. e system with the tape driver installed and configured insf automatically creates the device special files that enable you to use the features of the specific tape drive technologies You will create customized device special files using mksf only for special circumstances such as when you have to write a tape on a tape drive that supports data compression but you intend to read it on a tape drive that does not support data compression Examples are given in Creating Customized Device Special Files for Tape Devices later in this chapter Configuring Tape Drives 6 1 Selecting Device Drivers for a Tape Device and Interface The following sections will help you identify the device drivers needed to configure a tape drive Choose the drivers based on the interface to which the tape drive is being connected Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 show default device special file names created for tape drives depending on whether your HP UX system is configured with long or short file names Limited 9 x device file notation is also shown for backward compatibility HP IB Tape Drive Configuration Guidelines HP IB tape drives can be configured to a Series 800 CIO or HP PB HP IB interface card Note the EISA bus does not support HP IB tape drivers thus you cannot configure most tape drives to the EISA HP IB card See Table 6 2 for exceptions Although the HP IB bus can accommodate as many as 30 addresses HP tape drives use a protocol calle
133. e you 8 data bits and no parity which are required by screen oriented applications 1 Edit the getty entry in etc inittab so that the device special file for the terminal points to the H entry in etc gettydefs ttp2 234 respawn usr sbin getty h ttyOp2 H 2 Reissue the sbin init q command to activate the updated etc inittab file See gettydefs 4 in the HP UX Reference 3 12 Configuring Terminals and Modems Configuring a Non HP Terminal as a Console HP supports Wyse 60 terminals with native ASCII keyboards VT320 and VT100 compatible as defined by DEC VT420 terminals in their default power on configuration as system consoles for HP 9000 Series 800 E Family 3 computers Also HP 700 60 terminals can be configured to emulate the non HP consoles Only HP terminals are supported as system consoles on other HP 9000 Series 800 computers Two HP MUX interface modules support configuration of a non HP terminal console provided you have the correct firmware version m Access port MUX16 part number A1703 60022 for Series 800 HP PB with firmware version Rev 2 30 datecode 3341 If you installed the card you should have recorded the firmware revision on a worksheet in Appendix D m The access port MUX module integrated into the core I O card of Model I computers If you are configuring a non HP terminal or terminal emulation proceed through the instructions provided in the following sections and note the limitatio
134. ed in the kernel 3 Specifying scsil or scsi3 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel SCSI Addressing Up to seven single ended SCSI or fifteen fast wide SCSI devices can be configured to a single SCSI device adapter Each device requires a unique bus address a For single ended SCSI addresses range from 7 to 0 with 7 highest priority reserved for the adapter itself and 0 being the lowest priority a For fast wide SCSI addresses range from 7 to 0 with 7 highest priority reserved for the adapter itself and 14 to 8 lowest priority Although most peripheral devices require only one address the Optical Disk Library System HP C17xxA uses three SCSI addresses two for the magnet optical drives and one for the autochanger picker Configuring Interface Cards 2 23 SCSI Cabling Multiple SCSI peripheral devices can be connected to a single SCSI interface using a daisy chain configuration The final SCSI device in the daisy chain requires the proper terminator discussed later in SCSI Signal Termination Note The SCSI bus should be kept as short as possible Total cable length for single ended SCSI must not exceed six meters Total cable length for fast wide SCSI must not exceed 25 meters These limitations include both internal and external cables Refer to the documentation that came with your device for internal cable lengths Table 2 14 SCSI Cables Product Length Connectivity Desc
135. elf with the program A 6 EISA Board Configuration Displaying CFG Files Type the cfgfiles command to display the CFG files currently in the sbin lib eisa directory The cfgtypes command lists and explains each board type For example NET is a network board EISA cfgfiles Filename Board Type Board Name HWPCO1O0 SYS HP Series 700 EISA System Board XYZ1401 MSD XYZ SCSI Controller XYZ1702 PAR XYZ Centronics Interface XYZ1802 NET XYZ Networking Board XYZ2276 VID XYZ Video Board EISA Board Configuration A 7 Adding a Board Make sure the CFG file is present in the sbin lib eisa directory If it is absent check the documentation supplied with the card CFG files are required for EISA cards but advisory only for ISA cards Type a show slot command to see in which slots the XYZ1802 board can be installed Then type the add command to add the board to slot 2 eisa_config displays the new configuration EISA show slot XYZ1802 Valid slots for this board 2 4 EISA add XYZ1802 2 Added board XYZ Networking Board Comments The XYZ Networking board is an IEEE 802 3 local area networking board for use with twisted pair cabling Slot CFG File Contents 0 HWPCO10 HP Series 700 EISA System Board 1 XYZ1401 XYZ SCSI Controller 2 XYZ1802 XYZ Networking Board 3 XYZ1702 XYZ Centronics Interface 4 EMPTY You can use the comment command to display help or comments provided by the manufacturer ab
136. en s is unspecified See the disk 7 manpage 4 Specifying hpib1 causes sio pfail and pa to be included automatically into the kernel 4 6 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives HP FL Disk Configuration Guidelines Series 700 does not accept HP FL disks Table 4 2 lists the device drivers required for configuring an HP FL disk device for each supported architecture Table 4 2 HP FL Disk Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File 4 Series 800 CIO 27111A disc2 dev rldsk c t d s Series 800 CIO HP Al1749A disc2 same as above emulation on HP PB Series 800 HP PB 28615A disc4 same as above 1 The following disk drives can be configured to a Series 800 CIO HP FL interface 7936FL 7937FL C2201A C2204A C2252B BZ HA HZ C2254B BZ HA HZ Models shown in parenthesis are obsolete and are listed for reference only 2 disc2 supports disk arrays only in striped mode it does not support independent mode Specifying disc2 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail pa and hpf10 to be included in the kernel 3 c t d s derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the disk is attached t is the address of the device on the interface d is the device unit number s specifies section number and is provided for backward compatibility the device file addresses the en
137. entry in etc gettydefs Typically the gettydefs file is set up so that each time you press the key getty tries the next speed setting as defined in etc gettydefs When getty matches the speed set to your terminal you will get a readable login prompt Parity generation checking mismatch Use stty to determine the proper settings for the terminal The TERM environment variable is incorrectly set If you have an HP terminal try setting the TERM value to hp using your shell s set command A running process is producing garbage output The cable might be miswired or the data line might be noisy You might have a hardware failure in your interface card modem MUX or other device The TERM environment variable is required for software compatibility with the terminal At the time of login HP UX software reads the terminfo setting If you have changed the configuration during a terminal session you need to alert the software to the change by exporting the TERM variable For example in Korn shell export TERM vt 100 Refer to the terminfo 4 manpage for further explanation Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 33 For Further Information on Terminals and Modems The following manpages specify terminal and modem related functionality mesg 1 pg 1 stty 1 tabs 1 telnet 1 tput 1 tset 1 tsm 1 tty 1 ttytype 1 captoinfo 1M dpp 1M getty 1M mksf 1M rlogind 1M tic 1M untic 1M uugetty 1M gettydefs 4 te
138. er or plotter 2 If you have customized it copy the etc 1lp interface printer_name to a temporary location cp etc lp interface laserjet etc lp interface laserjet_old 3 Remove the printer or plotter from the LP spooler by following the procedure for Removing a Printer or Printer Class using HP UX Commands detailed in the chapter Managing Printers and Printer Output of the HP UX System Administration Tasks manual 4 Execute usr sbin ioscan to identify the printer or plotter s hardware 7 address which you are going to change For example in the following output an HP 2564B HP IB printer was set with an HP IB address of 7 usr sbin ioscan fn H 2 8 Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description cio 1 2 8 cio_ca0O CLAIMED INTERFACE CIO Adapter ext_bus 8 2 8 0 hpibo CLAIMED INTERFACE printer 1 2 8 0 7 1pro CLAIMED DEVICE HP 256x HP IB Ciper Printer dev diag c8t7d0_lp dev c8t7d0_lp Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 27 5 Turn off unplug and disconnect the printer or plotter 6 Reset the switches on the printer or plotter if necessary and attach the device to the new hardware location 7 Execute ioscan again In this example the HP IB address was changed from 7 to 5 ioscan reports the new address and indicates under S W State that no hardware is present at the old printer address usr sbin ioscan fn I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description 2 8 cio_ca0O CLA
139. eries 800 parallel plotters 7 12 Series 800 parallel printers 7 11 Series 800 RS 232 C plotters 7 10 Series 800 RS 232 C printers 7 9 Series 800 SCSI disk drives 4 9 Series 800 SCSI printers 7 13 Series 800 SCSI tape drivers 6 5 HP terminals in non HP modes 3 3 HP UX runstate 3 28 HP VUE 3 0 User s Guide 3 1 hshpib 2 18 6 4 7 6 7 7 H W Path defined 1 10 identifying device special files with a peripheral device 1 14 identifying run level 3 28 init 1M 3 11 3 31 init command A 8 initializing configuration A 8 inittab 4 3 10 3 12 3 27 3 31 Index 11 inquiry response 4 37 insf 1M 4 13 6 1 6 2 6 8 7 26 and data compression 6 5 creating additional device files for disk library 5 9 installation guidelines HP FL 2 16 installing device adapter 2 1 installing graphics devices 2 14 installing interface card 2 1 instance number 1 12 C 5 and class 1 12 and interface card 1 6 1 12 defined 1 6 location of 1 12 significance of 1 12 instro 2 18 7 7 C 11 configuring devices 7 24 instrument address C 11 instrumentation access 2 18 instruments C 1 interactive mode A 1 interface card installing 2 1 interface card instance number significance of 1 12 interface cards 25525A B 2 23 25560A 2 18 7 6 7 7 25567B 2 20 27110B 2 18 7 6 7 7 27147 60002 7 13 27147A 2 23 28615A 2 16 28639 50001 2 5 28639 60001 3 5 8 5 28650A B 2 18 7 7 28651A 7 7 28655A 2 11 2 23
140. ernal asio0 dev tty p Series 800 CIO 98196A3 mux0 same as above 98190A Series 800 HP PB 40299B3 mux2 same as above J2092A J2093A J2094A J2096A A1703 60022 Series 800 HP PB A1703 60003 mux4 same as above 1 The following model plotters can be configured to the Series 700 serial interface 7440A 7475A 7550A 7558 7570A 7576A 7596C C1620A C1625A C1627A C1629A C2847A C2848A C2858A C2859A C3170A C3171A C3180A C3181A 2 The device file created by default is the standard dev ttyinstance pport For ease of system administration HP recommends that you create a line printer device file dev c p _lp using mksf as explained in Creating a Device Special File for a Printer or Plotter Configured to a Serial Port The device naming convention derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the tty class of interface card to which the device is attached and p is the port to which the plotter is attached 3 The following plotter models can be configured to the Series 800 RS 232 C serial interface 7440A 7475A 7550A B 7558 7586B 7595A 7595B 7596A 7596B 7599A C1620A C1625A C1627A HP plotter models 7595A and 7596A can also be configured to an RS 422 interface 4 Specifying mux0 causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 5 Specifying mux2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 6 These cards are typically used for console and remote console If t
141. ernel when you build a kernel Under most circumstances insf creates useful device special files when the system boots up However for some special circumstances it may be necessary to create these files using mknod Major and Minor Numbers C 15 Creating Device Special Files using mknod To create device special files for any driver other than those listed on the insf and mksf manpages use mknod 1 Change directory to dev 2 Determine the major number by invoking the lsdev command 3 Construct a minor number for the device by using the bit assignments for the device driver For HP devices the bit assignments are found in tables earlier in this Appendix For custom device drivers consult documentation supplied with the driver 4 Create the device special files for the device using the following syntax usr sbin mknod lt file_name gt blc lt major gt lt minor gt Name the file something easily associated with the device Use b for block device special file or c for character device special file Make files for both block and character if driver supports both Use the block or character major number reported by 1sdev Use the minor number constructed from the bit assignment tables For example the scope device driver has block and character major numbers of 65 and 234 respectively Its minor number of 0x026000 is constructed like instrO see Table C 5 Bits 8 through 15 encode 2 as the card instance of t
142. ers 7 11 parallel interface 2 11 parallel polling and HP tape drives 6 2 parity terminal vs console 3 12 path hardware 1 10 pefdc 4 10 pefloppy 4 10 PC floppy disk configuration guidelines 4 10 pdno 2 20 2 21 C 11 performance disk drives 4 2 distribution of data 4 2 magneto optical disk devices 5 2 root disk drive 6 2 tape drives 6 2 peripheral adding overview 1 15 peripherals removing using HP UX commands 4 36 third party 2 28 personality cards B 7 28639 60001 3 5 A1703 60003 3 5 A1703 60022 3 5 and networking configuration 2 20 connectivity for 2 5 personality multi functional card B 9 pfail 2 5 2 16 2 18 2 23 3 5 45 4 7 4 9 5 4 5 6 6 2 6 4 7 6 7 7 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 8 5 planning CD ROM configuration 4 3 disk array configuration 4 3 disk drive configuration 4 2 floppy disk drive configuration 4 4 interface card configuration 2 2 magneto optical disk libraries configuration 5 2 modem configuration 3 3 printer and plotter configuration 7 2 tape drive configuration 6 2 terminal configuration 3 2 plotters 7440A 7 10 7 12 7475A 7 10 7550A 7 10 7550B 7 12 7558 7 10 7570A 7 10 7576A 7 10 7586B 7 10 7595A B 7 10 7596A 7 24 7596A B 7 10 7596A C 7 7 7596C 7 10 7599A 7 10 C1600A 7 12 C1601A 7 12 C1620A 7 7 7 10 7 12 C1625A 7 7 7 10 7 12 C1627A 7 7 7 10 7 12 C1629A 7 10 7 12 C1631A
143. es device drivers and device special files used for each supported architecture Table 8 2 UPS Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Driver Default Card Device Special Files Series 800 HP PB 40299B mux2 dev mux J2092A dev tty p J2093A J2094A J2096A A1703 60022 1 HP UX supports the following HP PowerTrust UPS models A2941A A2994A A2996A A2997A A2998A The following third party UPS models can be used with HP computers but do not provide the software capabilities of HP PowerTrust models APPCC 600UX APPCC 1250UX DELT 2326 C2 DELT 2336 C2 Not all supported models are appropriate for all computer systems 2 Specifying mux2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 3 tty p derives from ioscan output The numeral after tty is the card instance for the tty class of interface card to which the device is attached the numeral after p is the port number of the serial interface Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems 8 5 Configuring a PowerTrust UPS The simplest way to configure a uninterruptable power system is to use SAM usr sbin sam If SAM is not loaded on your system or if you prefer to use the command line interface the following procedure will guide you through the task Familiarize yourself with the instructions before getting started 1 Examine Table 8 2 to identify the driver and interface card associated with the specific platform to which you ar
144. es can be powered by an HP PowerTrust UPS are found in the HP Configuration Guide When adding disks or other peripherals to any computer covered by a UPS recalculate the voltage amperage VA load to ensure that the new current draw remains within the UPS coverage Prepare the site before installing the UPS following the recommendations provided in the UPS hardware installation manual and PowerTrust System Guide HP part number 5961 8383 for your UPS model Figure 8 1 illustrates a sample UPS configuration Note the RS 232 C cabling from the console to SPU is not shown All protected components derive their electrical power through the UPS which is plugged into the power source 8 2 Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems Figure 8 1 Sample Configuration of an Uninterruptible Power System UPS Cabling Guidelines To communicate with the host each PowerTrust UPS comes with an RS 232 C serial connector HP part number 5061 2569 pinouts shown in Table 8 1 The cable has a male DB 9 connector on the UPS end and a male DB 25 connector on the MUX end and is 2 meters 6 5 feet long If this length is insufficient you can extend it by using a straight through 25 wire RS 232 C extender cable 3062C 25 feet long from the MUX port to the DB 25 connector end of the cable supplied with the UPS and then the UPS cable to the DB 9 connector of the UPS Total RS 232 C cable length should be no more than ten meters maximum Configuring
145. es them best suited for fast retrieval of infrequently accessed archival data unattended backup and storage of large data files such as electronic images Data can be written to the optical disks in raw mode or as files cpio dd and other HP UX commands can access optical disks in raw or block mode LVM can be used to configure partitions on magneto optical devices Note however that LVM is not supported for spanning disks on magneto optical devices Typically magneto optical disk libraries require installation by an HP Service Engineer Note Magneto optical devices are shipped with a shipping screw in place to ensure that the product is not damaged in transit Consult the hardware documentation for instructions on removing the shipping screw before configuring the device Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 5 1 Planning to Configure a Magneto Optical Device Magneto optical disk devices are configured into the operating system much like a SCSI hard disk drive Choose the device drivers that must be present in the kernel for HP UX to communicate with your magneto optical device based on m whether you are configuring a single disk or a magneto optical disk library m the architecture and interface to which you are configuring the device Characteristics of Magneto Optical Devices Magneto optical devices yield good performance if data is distributed properly within its structural framework The size of an individual
146. esence of those drivers in stand system also If any necessary driver is absent you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep system_prep writes a system file based on your current kernel in the current directory That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel Configuring Interface Cards 2 29 mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 2 Notify users that the system will be shut down to configure the new interface card and any related peripheral device You can use the wall command and or the interactive capabilities of the shutdown command to broadcast a message to users before the system goes down See wall 1M or shu
147. ev dsk cOt6d0 56 52 6 0 Boot Disk Root lvol1 on dev dsk cOt6d0 Swap lvol2 on dev dsk cOt6do Dump 1lvol3 on dev dsk cOt6dO 3 Notify users that the system will be shut down to move the disk You can use the wall command and or the interactive capabilities of the shutdown command to broadcast a message to users before the system goes down See wall 1M or shutdown 1M in the HP UX Reference 4 If your system is an NFS server and file systems on the disk you are moving are exported a Find the NFS clients by logging in to the NFS server and looking at the etc exports file Refer to exports 4 in the HP UX Reference b Notify the users on the NFS client systems that data on the disk being relocated will be inaccessible temporarily users on a diskless system will be unable to use their system at all 4 26 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives c Unmount the file systems from the NFS client If you do not unmount the file systems from the client the client will receive NFS error messages when accessing the files on the disk There are several methods to unmount the NFS client file systems m Enter the Remote Administration area of SAM on the NFS server and unmount the file systems remotely m Log in directly to each NFS client and unmount the file systems using either SAM or HP UX commands Refer to the file systems chapter of the HP UX System Administration Tasks for specific instructions on
148. ev ttyd1p4 8 Kill processes associated with the problem terminal Before killing processes use extreme caution to be sure you are not killing a valid process that just happens to be taking a long time to complete First examine the system s active processes as shown Then to kill all processes associated with a specific TTY device for example ttyd2p5 execute the kill command to force specified process IDs PID to terminate Execute the kill command in the following 3 30 Configuring Terminals and Modems 10 11 12 sequence kill 15 kill 3 kill 1 kill 9 See signal 5 for definitions ps ef UID PID PPID C STIME TTY TIME COMMAND root 94 root 14517 jaz 20133 root 22147 jaz 21234 20133 jaz 21235 21234 Jul 20 tty0p5 Jul 21 ttydip4 11 20 24 ttyd2p5 13 33 45 12 22 05 ttyd2p5 12 22 12 ttyd2p5 00 usr sbin getty h ttyOp5 9600 01 csh csh 00 csh csh 00 etc getty h ttyd2p3 9600 01 rlogin remote 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04 rlogin remote kill 15 21235 21234 20133 Once the processes terminate init restarts a new getty process for that terminal provided its etc inittab entry contains respawn Check the parameters of the unresponsive terminal s device file Like all files device special files have access permissions that must be set to allow you access For example permissions set to 622 crw w w are appropriate for a terminal Make certai
149. exers problems occur when m dev muxn is deleted or has inappropriate permissions m the download firmware is deleted or has inappropriate permissions a sbin dasetup is not run from etc inittab dasetup should only be run from inittab Do not run it in any state other than single user mode Garbage Displayed on the Terminal Screen If garbage is mixed with valid data the problem might be m Noise on the data line because o RS 232 C cable is too long maximum recommended length is 50 feet or 15 meters at 9600 baud o data cable is situated near electrically noisy equipment such as motors o wires are partially shorted or broken within the cable o telephone connection is noisy Parity is incorrectly set See Differences between Console and Terminal Configuration Hardware problem with a modem interface card or the terminal itself The program performing I O might be sending the garbage m The Display Functns feature of your terminal is enabled which displays characters that would not normally print You might be displaying a non ASCII file If everything printed is garbage examine these possible causes 3 32 Configuring Terminals and Modems Baud rate mismatch most likely If your terminal s speed setting differs from that read by the stty command garbage will appear on your screen If you have not yet logged in press the Break key followed by Return Return to force getty to try the next
150. f the interface card in the card cage Class and instance number can be seen in the first two columns of usr sbin ioscan f output When interpreting a device special file the only significant instance number is the card instance that is the instance number for the class of interface to which a device is attached Thus in a sample disk device file dev rdsk c1t4d0 the c1 refers to the card instance not to an LU number as in previous releases represents the target address of the device on the interface bus and can range from 0 to 7 maximum Typically t is the address set with jumpers or dip switches on the device itself represents the device number and can range from 0 to 7 maximum On SCSI devices d is the SCSI LUN on HP FL and HP IB it is the unit number Except for multi function devices d is typically do specifies section number optional made available for backward compatibility Note section 0 now represents the entire disk while section 2 represents a small disk section previously section 0 If the s is not shown the device special file refers to the entire disk Getting Started Sample Device Special File Names Every peripheral specific chapter in this book has tables of configuration requirements that show the default device special file names for that class of device Here are some sample device special files and their possible meanings dev rdsk c0t6d0 Entire disk accessed in character raw
151. ferred to as noncritical operation d Print a copy of your etc ups_conf file so that you can refer to it when cabling the UPS hardware You will want to verify that the device special file associated with upstty matches that used by the UPS For example upstty dev tty0p1 specifies that the UPS is plugged into the second port p1 of an RS 232 MDP connected to an interface card at card instance 0 Bring the system down to a halt shutdown h then turn power off Install the UPS hardware following instructions provided in the hardware documentation Also see the cabling information provided in Cabling Guidelines earlier in this chapter Power up the peripherals PowerTrust then SPU On rebooting HP UX will configure all connected components Everything connected to the UPS will be protected against sudden power failure Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems 8 9 Configuring UPS to Cycle Power During Non Work Hours In work environments where energy savings is crucial you can use your UPS to cycle power on and off according to a specified schedule You can set this up with two commands Instruct cron to implement the power_onoff command unattended as part of a routine schedule Consult the cron 1M and power_onoff 1M manpages for information on using this feature The following procedure causes the system to shut down at 5 30pm and start up at 7 30am each weekday Saturday and Sunday the system remains powere
152. for disk drives 4 5 selecting device drivers for magneto optical devices 5 2 selecting device drivers for tape drives 6 2 selecting driver for interface card 2 5 serial connectivity RS 232 C 2 5 serial ports cabling 2 9 configuring for a modem 3 6 configuring for a printer 7 14 configuring for a terminal 3 6 creating device files for printers and plotters 7 18 Series 700 bus architecture B 2 configuring SDS disks 4 16 configuring whole disks 4 16 EISA SCSI 4 9 HP FL unsupported 4 7 HP IB limitations 4 5 Models 735 755 4 9 RS 232 C plotters 7 10 RS 232 C printers 7 9 SCSI 4 9 SCSI tape drives 6 5 SDS disks 4 14 used as cluster server B 2 Series 800 bus architecture B 7 CIO HP FL disk drives 4 7 CIO HP IB disk drives 4 5 CIO RS 232 C plotters 7 10 CIO RS 232 C printers 7 9 CIO SCSI disk drives 4 9 CIO SCSI printers 7 13 CIO SCSI tape drives 6 5 configuring a modem 3 22 configuring disks with hard partitions 4 16 configuring LVM disks 4 16 ensuring the modem port is not locked 3 22 floppy disk configuration 4 10 hard partitions sections 4 14 HP PB HP FL disk drives 4 7 HP PB HP IB disk drives 4 5 HP PB parallel plotters 7 12 HP PB parallel printers 7 11 HP PB RS 232 C plotters 7 10 HP PB RS 232 C printers 7 9 HP PB SCSI disk drives 4 9 HP PB SCSI printers 7 13 HP PB SCSI tape drives 6 5 Model E 1 9 B 7 B 8 multi function card 3 22
153. g the command usr sbin ioscan fn C tty from the system console or any login to the system using an active terminal m Ifthe necessary driver is present in the kernel likely the ioscan output of a Series 700 might resemble this asr sbin ioscan d asioO fn Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description O 2 0 4 asioO CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in RS 232 C dev ttyOpo 1 2 0 5 asioO CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in RS 232 C dev tty1po Similarly the ioscan output of a Series 800 system might resemble this usr sbin ioscan d mux4 fn Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description CLAIMED INTERFACE MUX dev diag mux0 dev diag ttyOpO dev ttyOpO dev diag ttyOp1 dev mux0 dev ttyOpl The fn option caused ioscan to display the device special files created by insf insf automatically creates device special files appropriate for terminals at each serial port The sample device special file highlighted communicates with port 1 p1 of the MUX card found at card instance 0 of tty class 3 6 Configuring Terminals and Modems You can display the device file s characteristics by invoking usr sbin lssf on the file By comparing 1ssf and 11 output you can see that bits 16 to 23 of the minor number 0x000100 correspond to the port number of 1 See Appendix C for explanation of bit assignments usr sbin lssf dev tty0p1 mux4 card instance O port 1 hardwired at address 56 0 dev ttyOp1
154. gives verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system Configuring Tape Drives 6 7 d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 3 Notify users that the system will be shut down to configure the tape drive You can use the wall command and or the interactive capabilities of the shutdown command to broadcast a message to users before the system goes down See wall 1M or shutdown 1M in the HP UX Reference 4 Bring the system to a halt using the shutdown command 5 Turn off the power to all peripheral devices and then to the SPU 6 Install the hardware following instructions shown in the hardware documentation When attaching the tape drive set the switches on the tape drive to an unused address which you will have determined from ioscan output Use the cabling recommended in the hardware documentation
155. h 0 Off 1 On If 28 is On 29 used as follows 0 Mouse 1 Keyboard 30 31 0 audio Instance Number 0 Read write device Output destination Output format 1 control only device Ignored if bits 28 31 0 0 Headphone internal speaker line out for Audio IT 1 Headphone only 2 Int speaker only 3 No output 4 Line output only Audio II Ignored if bits 20 23 1 0 No change 1 Mu law 2 A law 3 16 bit linear 1 See usr include sys scsi h 2 Corresponds to bits 1011 for the function number of the PS2 device C 10 Major and Minor Numbers Associating a Custom Driver with a Peripheral If you are configuring HP peripherals and standard HP drivers HP UX configures the elements automatically provided the drivers have been included in the kernel input file Consider however the scenario of having a peripheral device for which you need to use a custom driver Perhaps you have received the driver on a tape which you have loaded onto your system If you want to associate a driver with only a specific hardware path you must include the driver and the peripheral address in a driver statement of the stand system file You must make sure the driver can be found by the kernel build utility and you must rebuild the kernel Note You can use this technique to load any sio style driver or wsio style device driver You cannot force configure wsio style interface drivers at a specific address using
156. he interface card and bits 16 through 19 encode 6 as the instrument address usr sbin mknod dev scope b 65 0x026000 usr sbin mknod dev c_scope c 234 0x026000 5 Verify the configuration by invoking ioscan with the fun or fkn option If created properly the new device special files will be displayed with the configured device C 16 Major and Minor Numbers D Worksheets Copy these worksheets as many times as you need for the devices on your system Keep a current copy of usr sbin ioscan fk output as an aid in configuring and troubleshooting your system Worksheets D 1 Interface Cards Part name and number Version and date Serial number Firmware revision Station address LANIC ID Hardware address Dip switch settings 1 Use usr sbin lanscan or usr sbin lanadmin to identify the station address Part name and number Version and date Serial number Firmware revision Station address LANIC ID Hardware address Dip switch settings D 2 Worksheets Terminals and Modems Part name and number Serial number Cabling Interface card port number Hardware address Dip switch settings Driver device file minor number Modem use baud rate protocol 1 Note if configured via DTC or distribution panel 2 Note if configured as console or serial
157. he minor number 0x023000 represents a SCSI disk device set with a SCSI address of 3 connected to a SCSI interface at card instance 2 and might be shown as follows bits 8 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 binary 0000 0010 0011 0000 0000 0000 hex 0x 0 2 3 0 0 0 0000 0010 The eight bits of the card instance number is 2 c2 in a device special file name 0011 The SCSI address target set on the device is 3 t3 ina device special file name 0000 0000 0000 The remaining bits are set to zero dO in a device special file name C 6 Major and Minor Numbers Adjusting Bits to Read a Floppy Disk Media used by tape drives and floppy disk drives have different densities There might be times when you need to read a floppy disk that was written on older technology For example a Series 800 Model E computer has a built in SCSI floppy disk drive whose typical minor number is 0x005000 However when attempting to read a floppy disk originally created on a 2 88MB drive you might want to create minor numbers 0x005004 and 0x005005 As shown in Table C 3 both minor numbers adjust bits in the range 28 31 to accommodate the 2 88MB drive and allow you to try to read the diskette with or without a set geometry determined Minor Number Bit Assignments The tables on the following pages show the bit assignments for bits 16 through 31 for the principal HP device drivers In all cases bits 8
158. he second port is not being used for remote console a plotter may be attached 7 Specifying mux4 causes lanmux0 lan3 lantty0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 7 10 Configuring Printers and Plotters Guidelines for Configuring a Printer or Plotter to a Parallel Centronics Interface Table 7 5 Parallel Printer Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Series 700 Core I O internal CentIt dev c t d0_1p Series 800 HP PB 28655A4 lpr2 same as above 1 The following printer models can be configured to the Series 700 parallel interface 2562C 2563C 2566C 2567C 33449A 33459A C1645A C1656A C1686A C2010A C2011A C2021A C2040A C2106A C2113A C2114A C2121A C2356A 2 Specifying CentIf causes CharDrv to be included in the kernel 3 c t d derives from the hardware path as shown in ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the printer is attached t is the target number d is the device number 4 The following printer models can be configured to the Series 800 HP PB parallel interface 2225C P 2227A 2228A 2235A 2276A 2277A 2562C 2563A B C 2564B C 2565A 2566B 2566C 2567B 2567C 2684A P 2686A D 2932A 2934A 33438P 33440A 33447A 33449A 33459A 33471 A 3630A C1202A C1602A C2106A Obsolete models are shown in parenthesis and
159. hown in usr conf master d core hpux the major number for framebuf the driver that provides the additional graphics capability is 174 A character raw device special file is required Use the bit assignments shown for graph3 interface driver in Table C 5 in Appendix C of this manual Graphics capabilities can be enhanced by installation of any of a growing family of cards and subsystems Table 2 8 is intended only to give a rough idea of the possibilities available on HP workstations Consult your HP Sales Representative for information targeted to your specific needs Configuring Interface Cards 2 13 Table 2 8 Graphics Enhancement Capabilities Product Compatibility Provision 98768A CRX subsystem Series 700 Upgrades to CRX color graphics workstation A1439 24 bit Z Buffer and Graphics Accelerator card Models 720 730 735 750 or 755 Converts CRX 24 workstation to a CRX 24Z configuration A2269A Dual CRX Graphics card Models 720 730 735 750 755 Upgrades Model 750 or 755 from dual CRX workstation to a quad CRX four monitor configuration provides connectivity for two graphics displays on a single card A2270A A2271A A2272A Models 720 730 735 750 755 Upgrades Model 750 or 755 CRX 24 to a dual CRX 24 two monitor configuration Upgrades Models 720 730 735 750 or 755 to CRX 24 workstations A2272A upgrades a Series 700 PVRX workstation to CRX 24 configuration
160. iffers significantly from using a floppy disk drive on a personal computer o Unlike personal computer floppies you can make a file system on an HP UX floppy disk Use newfs to create the file system Consult etc disktab to choose an entry for example ibm1440 appropriate for the capacity of the floppy disk To access a file system on a floppy disk you must mount it first a Media removal and replacement while the device is open is not supported A floppy disk containing a mounted file system must not be removed prior to being unmounted Removal of floppy disks while the device is open is likely to result in file system errors and system crashes o If an application requires that you insert and remove media while the program is running the floppy disk should work properly 4 4 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Selecting Device Drivers for a Disk Device and Interface The following sections covering HP IB HP FL and SCSI interfaces and floppy disk drives identify the device drivers that must be present in the kernel for HP UX to communicate with your disk device Choose the device drivers based on the interface to which you are configuring the disk device If you are configuring a custom written device driver on a Series 700 consult the Driver Development Guide for guidelines Once you have identified your device drivers proceed to Configuring HP UX 4 for a New Disk Device HP IB Disk C
161. ilter 1M plotdvr HP GL plotter filter 7 30 Configuring Printers and Plotters 8 Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems Installing a PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System UPS to an HP UX computer ensures that power is maintained to your computer system for up to fifteen minutes after an AC power failure preventing problems such as networking timeouts and tape rewinds The PowerTrust UPS can be configured to bring the system down with a graceful shutdown before its batteries deplete thus maintaining data integrity and ensuring a clean reboot and reasonable systemwide fsck PowerTrust UPS is configured as a serial device This chapter details the configuration guidelines Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems 8 1 Planning to Configure a UPS Hardware Considerations Choose your UPS based on its rated load capabilities Determine which pieces of hardware besides the server require coverage by a UPS For example m If users in another building rely on the server or several servers in a building require LAN traffic to shut down cleanly you might need to ensure that the LAN interface is protected by the UPS a If you need to call in to the UPS based servers the dialback and DTC to which it is attached may need to be on the UPS Calculate the voltage amperage VA capacity to ensure that your UPS unit is properly rated for the expected load Detailed instructions for calculating how many systems and or devic
162. ime by executing the 4 lsautofl command You should see hpux 0 stand vmunix e Boot your system by typing in the contents of the AUTO file Note if you have moved a root LVM disk boot to LVM maintenance mode by using the 1m option For example ISL gt hpux boot 0 stand vmunix or ISL gt hpux lm boot 0 stand vmunix This command loads the kernel from the HP UX file system and transfers control to the loaded device On booting up insf identifies all devices it finds including the newly moved disk and creates dev files for them 14 Log in 15 If you have moved an LVM root disk proceed through the following sequence of commands to gain access to the root disk at the new location a Execute a vgchange command to reactivate the root volume group b Execute an lvlnboot command to view the logical volumes in the volume group c Execute an lvrmboot command to remove the current definitions of root swap and dump from the disk s Boot Data Reserved Area Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 31 d Execute lvlnboot commands to redefine root swap and dump Use the v option for verbose output e Execute a vgchange command to deactivate the root volume f Reboot the system For example if root is redefined as lvol1 swap as 1vol2 and dump as lvol3 usr sbin vgchange y dev vg00 usr sbin 1lvlnboot usr sbin lvrmboot dev vg00 usr sbin lvlnboot dev vg00 lvol1
163. ing model plotters can be configured to HP 25560A the Series 700 EISA HP IB interface card 7596A C C1620A C1625A C1627A Note eisa_config identifies the 25560A card as HWPOC70 2 insf does not create a default device file for the Series 700 hpib driver Use asr sbin mknod or usr sbin sam to create the plotter s device special file 3 The following model plotters can be configured to HP 27110B the Series 800 CIO HP IB interface card and to Series 800 HP PB interface cards 28650A B and 28651A 7440A 7475A 7550A 7550B 7586B 7595A B 7596A B 7599A C1600A C1601A C1620A C1625A C1627A Obsolete models are shown in parenthesis and are listed for reference only 4 insf produces 31 device specials files for instrO in the first syntax shown where c represents the card instance for the instr class of interface card and t represents HP IB addresses 0 to 31 The device number d is always zero A 32nd device file has the second syntax shown encoding only the card instance of instr class Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 7 Guidelines for Configuring a Printer or Plotter to a Serial Interface m Check etc inittab to make sure you do not have a getty for a terminal spawned on the same serial port to which you are configuring a printer or plotter m Configure the printer or plotter s RS 232 C data transmission values to be consistent with your computer s requirements These requirements are documented in
164. interactively to fix the configuration and to reboot manually None Skipping Either the slot is empty or NVM reports the slot is empty or the slot has an ISA card but no EEPROM data or the slot A was skipped because of an already cited circumstance None EISA Board Configuration A 23 Message Cause Action Messages Cause Action Message Cause Action A 24 EISA card id etsa_id in slot slot_num had fatal error An EISA card asserted the IOCHK line indicating a fatal error An expansion card might do this if there was a parity error on a memory card Not all cards assert IOCHK Replace the card EISA_WARNING unable to allocate eeprom_geninfo EISA_WARNING unable to allocate eeprom_slot_info for slot 0 EISA_WARNING unable to allocate eeprom_slot_info EISA WARNING unable to allocate func_data EISA_WARNING unable to allocate eeprom_cfg_header EISA WARNING unable to allocate eeprom WARNING unable to map eeprom registers EISA WARNING unable to map eeprom These warnings indicate system problems when attempting to allocate resources necessary for EISA initialization If booting from an EISA device the system will not boot up If not booting from an EISA device the system will boot up but EISA will not be initialized Call your HP representative EISA_WARNING NVM checksum invalid clearing eeprom A checksum failed when performed on NVM at power up causing the system to erase the
165. inue to use it as root you will need to make sure the AUTO file on the root disk boot area does not specify a hard coded hardware path To check this a Locate the root disk by executing mount or bdf and looking for the entry b View the current contents of the AUTO file by executing the Lifcp command and using to display the output For example bdf Filesystem kbytes used avail used Mounted on dev dsk c1t6d0 1813487 467756 1164382 29 hera users 3916236 2978782 545830 85 hera home usr bin lifcp dev dsk c1t6d0 AUTO hpux 0 stand vmunix The output from lifcp should appear just as in this example If instead you see output that shows an explicit hardware path for example hpux 56 6 0 0 stand vmunix you will need to update the AUTO file To do so execute the mkboot command with the a option and verify your results usr sbin mkboot a hpux 0 stand vmunix dev dsk c1it6d0 usr bin lifcp dev dsk cit6d0 AUTO hpux 0 stand vmunix m Once the hardware path is removed the system will boot using the path selected from processor dependent code m The 0 specifies that you are dealing with the entire disk 4 28 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives m dev dsk cit6d0 is the device special file for the current location of the root disk Caution The mkboot command overwrites the contents of the autoboot string 8 If your stand system file includes optional
166. ipheral A Summary oaa L5 2 Configuring Interface Cards Planning to Configure an Interface Card aoa a aaa aa 2 2 Maximum Configurations o 2 4 Selecting Device Drivers for Your Interface Cards eoa 2 5 Asynchronous Data Communication Configuration Guidelines 2 5 Distribution Panels for Asynchronous Connectivity 2 7 Data Communication and Terminal Controllers DTC 2 8 RS 232 C Cabling Guidelines Loe 2 9 Centronics Parallel Configuration Guidelines wee ee ee DMI Contents 1 EISA Configuration Guidelines 2 2 2 2 2 12 Swapping to an EISA Device a Graphics Card Configuration Guidelines Loe ee ee ee ee 218 Graphics Cable Extensions lt a 2 15 Maintaining the Accuracy of Customized Graphics Configurations aa aa 5 HP FL Configuration Guidelines aaa aa 216 HP FL Cables and Accessories 2 2 DIT HP IB Configuration Guidelines 2 2 2 2 2 18 Instrumentation Access to HP IB 2 2 2 18 HP IB Cabling ooa a 219 Changing HP IB Address Switch Settings eo he Networking Configuration Guidelines 2 20 SCSI Configuration Guidelines 2 2 1 1 222 SCSI Addressing 2 a a ee ee ee ee 228 SCSI Cabling Calculating SCSI Cable Length Coe ee ee ee ee 2 26 SCSI Signal Termination 2 2 2 ee ee 2 27 SCSI Parity Loe eee ee 228 Changing the Bus Address of a SCSI Device woe eee ee 228 Configuring an Interface Card 2
167. is used instead of the hardware path and the port is 2 usr sbin mksf d mux2 I 0 a0 making cuaOp2 c 193 0x000201 usr sbin mksf d mux2 I 0 a1 making culOp2 c 193 0x000201 usr sbin mksf d mux2 I 0 a2 making ttydOp2 c 193 0x000202 4 Verify the creation of the device special files by using the lssf command For the Series 700 example usr sbin lssf dev cua0po asioO card instance O hardwired at address 2 0 4 dev cua0po usr sbin lssf dev cul0po asioO card instance O callout at address 2 0 4 dev cul0po usr sbin lssf dev ttyd0po asioO card instance O callin at address 2 0 4 dev cul0po For the Series 800 example Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 23 usr sbin lssf dev cua0p2 mux2 card instance 0 port 2 hardwired at address 56 0 dev cuaOp2 usr sbin lssf dev cul0p2 mux2 card instance 0 port 2 callout at address 56 0 dev cul0p2 usr sbin lssf dev ttydOp2 mux2 card instance 0 port 2 callin at address 56 0 dev cul0p2 5 With your modem still disconnected from the port edit the etc inittab file to add a getty entry for the modem port that will receive incoming calls The entries must conform to the format documented on the inittab 4 manpage of the HP UX Reference For example p5 234 respawn usr sbin getty h t 240 ttyd2p5 9600 The p5 is a label used to uniquely identify the entry This getty is executed when the system is in both run states 1 and 2 The
168. ision Rated load capability Interface card port number Hardware address Cabling Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers Hardware coverage Part name number Serial number Firmware Revision Rated load capability Interface card port number Hardware address Cabling Dip switch settings Drivers device special files minor numbers Hardware coverage D 8 Worksheets Index Index 2 28615A HP PB fiber optic link adapter 2 16 28643A 2 25 28643A SCSI Fiber Optical Extender 2 24 5 5061 2569 serial connector 8 3 5961 8383 8 2 7 700 60 3 5 700 96 3 5 700 98 3 5 7596A Draftmaster IT plotter 7 24 A Al439A CRX 24 graphics display interface card 2 14 A2269A Dual CRX graphics display interface card 2 14 A2941A 8 5 A2994A 8 5 A2996A 8 5 A2997A 8 5 A2998A 8 5 accelerator card HP Al454A 2 14 access mode bits C 8 Access port MUX16 3 13 access to printers and plotters 7 2 AC power failure and UPS 8 1 adding drivers 6 7 adding peripherals summary 1 15 addressing C 2 by decreasing priority 6 5 device drivers C 2 adjusting minor number bits C 2 adjusting minor number bits to read other densities C 7 AMIGO printer protocol 7 6 anti static workstation 2 2 APPCC 1250UX 8 5 APPCC 600UX 8 5 ar 1 C 14 ar 1M C 2 asio0 2 5 3 5
169. iting eisa_config You can save the current configuration without exiting eisa_config by using the save system sci command If the current configuration is not conflict free eisa_config notifies you and does not save the configuration By default save records the new configuration in non volatile memory NVM If you use system sci save does not record the new configuration in NVM but instead records it in the system sci file This file can be used to configure subsequent workstations See Creating Identical E ISA Configurations on Other Workstations later in this chapter When you quit eisa_config it creates the etc eisa config 1log file which contains information on all currently configured boards and their attributes Your next task will be to bring down the system set the physical switches and jumpers to match the new eisa_config specifications and reboot Setting Switches and Jumpers on an E ISA Interface Board When you exit eisa_config or use the show switch changed command you see a graphical representation of the switch and jumper settings that have changed during the eisa_config session The etc eisa config 1log file also contains all required switch and jumper settings for each board in your working configuration To set the switch and jumper settings 1 Print the etc eisa config log file as a record of all switch and jumper settings that have changed during the eisa_config session 2 Warn all users that yo
170. kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how you rebuild the kernel a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel and writes a system file in your current directory That is it creates stand build system The v gives verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 23 10 11 12 13 Bring the system down and physically install the disk device Turn on the power to all peripheral devices Wait for them to become ready then turn on power to the SPU Watch the bootup sequence and record the name of the block devic
171. l and telephony A third party card is also configurable for video and multimedia capabilities Sample Addresses A parallel printer is likely to have a hardware address of 2 0 6 0 A disk might have an address of 2 0 1 5 0 if the SCSI address on the device itself were set to 5 Figure B 1 Model 712 Bus Relationships Bus Architectures B 3 Model 725 100 Figure B 2 shows a sample layout for a Model 725 100 Figure B 3 shows its ioscan fn output The 725 has capability for up to 4 graphics monitors Core I O descends from slot 2 off the system bus and optionally at slot 5 E ISA interface cards configure at slot 4 and additional I O cards such as multiple fast wide SCSI interfaces and graphics accelerators can be installed at slots which show up in ioscan as 10 and 11 Sample Addresses Audio capabilities are accessed through hardware address 2 0 8 Access to the FDDI network would be addressed through 2 0 9 If a Fast Wide SCSI interface were plugged into slot 10 and a disk whose SCSI address is set to 6 were attached to that interface the disk would be addressed through 10 0 0 6 Figure B 2 Model 725 100 Bus Relationships B 4 Bus Architectures target disk target disk target disk lan hil tty ext_bus audio ba processor 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 62 Path Driver S W State H W Type Description root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics bus_adap
172. l Device Lol 6 Configuring Tape Drives Selecting Device Drivers for a Tape Device and Interface HP IB Tape Drive Configuration Guidelines SCSI Tape Drive Configuration Guidelines Configuring HP UX for a Tape Drive Creating Customized Device Special Files for Tape Devices Examples Reading a Tape on a Different Format Device Allowing for Trial and Error Avoiding Data Compression After Configuring a Tape Drive 7 Configuring Printers and Plotters Preparing to Configure HP UX for a Printer or Plotter Choosing Means of Access Hardware Concerns Software Concerns Selecting Device Drivers for Your Printer or Plotter Guidelines for Configuring a Printer or Plotter to an HP IB Interface Guidelines for Configuring a Printer o or Plotter to a Serial Interface Guidelines for Configuring a Printer o or Plotter to a Parallel Centronics Interface Guidelines for Configuring a Printer to a SCSI Interface Configuring a Printer Using HP UX Commands Creating a Device Special File for a Printer or Plotter Configured to a Serial Port Contents 4 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 11 6 2 6 2 6 5 6 7 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 11 6 11 6 13 7 2 7 2 7 4 7 4 7 5 7 5 7 8 7 11 7 13 7 14 7 18 Creating a Device Special File for an HP IB Printer Guidelines for Configuring a Non HP Printer to a Parallel Port Configuring a Plotter or other Non Automatically Configurable Output Devices Using HP U
173. le for the Series 700 hpib driver Use usr sbin mknod or usr sbin sam to create the printer s device special file See Appendix C for a mknod example 4 The following models can be configured to 27110B the Series 800 CIO HP IB interface card 2227B 2235B C D 2354A 2562C 2563C 2564B C 2565A 2566B C 2567B 2567C 2932A 2934A C1202A C1602A C2010A Obsolete models are shown in parenthesis and are listed for reference only 5 1lpro is required for CIPER protocol printers models 256x lpr1 is required for AMIGO protocol printers models 2235 2602 2673A 2931B G 2932A 2933 34A 3630A Specifying the drivers listed here also cause the following additional drivers to be included in the kernel cio_ca0 sio pfail pa 6 c t d derives from the hardware path as shown in ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the device is attached t is the HP IB unit number d is the device number Series 800 HP PB architecture does not support HP IB printer configuration 7 6 Configuring Printers and Plotters Table 7 2 HP IB Plotter Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device Files Series 700 EISA 25560A hshpib see note HwPoc7o hpib Series 800 CIO 27110B cio_ca0 dev hpib c t d0 hpibo dev hpib c instroO Series 800 HP PB 28650A B hpib1 same as CIO or instroO 28651A 1 The follow
174. library refer to the section Magneto Optical Disk Library Configuration Guidelines Table 5 2 lists the device drivers required to configure a magneto optical disk to single ended SCSI interface for each supported architecture Table 5 2 Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Series 7001 internal sdisk dev r dsk c t d s core I O only Series 800 CIO 27147A scsi2f same as above disc3 Series 800 HP PB 28655A scsii1 same as above disc3 1 The following optical disks listed with their respective product ID strings returned by SCSI Inquiry can be configured to a Series 700 single ended SCSI interface Series 800 CIO or HP PB single ended SCSI interface C1701A S6300 650A C1701C C1716C C2550B C1716T 2 Specifying sdisk causes sct1 c700 and wsio drivers to be included automatically in the kernel 3 c t d s derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the class of interface card to which the device is attached t is the address of the device on the interface d is the device unit number s specifies section number and is shown for backward compatibility the entire disk s0 is assumed when s is unspecified 4 Specifying scsi2 causes cio_ca0 to be included in the kernel 5 Specifying disc3 causes target to be included in the kernel 6 Specifying scsil causes sio
175. lug and disconnect the disk drive Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 35 11 Turn on any peripherals attached to the computer system and then the SPU On booting up insf identifies all devices it finds and creates dev files for them 12 Log in 13 Update any software application configurations that use the removed disk drive Refer to your software application documentation for specific instructions 4 36 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Finding Out the Disk Model Number and Other Information The diskinfo command displays useful information about a disk Execute it specifying the disk s character device special file For example usr sbin diskinfo dev rdsk cit2d0 SCSI describe of dev rdsk c1it2d0 4 vendor HP product id C3010M1 type direct access size 1956086 Kbytes bytes per sector 512 SCSI disks can be further identified by the product ID field The number displayed does not correspond to the HP model number of the disk but rather to an inquiry response derived from querying the disk firmware itself using a SCSI inquiry command The inquiry response often resembles a product number or product number family For example disks C243 and C2440 all report C2430D If you have a disk hardware problem and are working with an HP service engineer reporting the inquiry response gives him or her with useful information such as firmware revision disk me
176. ly an explicit reference to the location of swap and or dump and these are located on the disk being moved your kernel will have to be rebuilt for the operating system to find the new locations a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep which extracts the system file from the current kernel as follows cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system The system_prep script writes a system file in your current directory that is it creates stand build system The v gives verbose explanation as the script executes b Edit the stand build system file to reflect the new hardware path s c Build the kernel by invoking the command usr sbin mk_kernel s system The mk_kernel command creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 29 mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 9 Shut down and halt your system using the shutdown command 10 Turn off the peripheral devices including the disk drive a
177. m stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix Bring the system down and physically install the disk device Turn on the power to all peripheral devices Wait for them to become ready then turn on power to the SPU On booting up HP UX detects the new disk and associates it with its device driver insf creates a single character device special file and a single block device special file to communicate with the entire disk Execute usr sbin ioscan fun C disk again to verify that the disk device configured successfully and to identify its whole disk device special files dev r dsk c t d Use the mksf command to create device special files for each individual section being used on the disk Refer to the printout of etc checklist to identify the sections Note as of HP UX 10 0 sections 2 and 0 have been switched s0 now specifies whole disk s2 specifies the portion of the disk that was previously represented by s0 Also since sections are only minimally supported at 10 0 consult earlier documentation or version of etc disktab for disk sectioning geometry For example sbin mksf C disk H hardware_path I instance s section_number sbin mksf C disk H hardware_path I instance r s section_number Execute usr sbin ioscan fun H hardware_path to verify that the device special files were created successfully Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD RO
178. magneto optical disk device makes it suitable for use as a boot disk though its performance does not match that of a standard hard disk Series 800 systems cannot be booted from magneto optical devices Magneto optical disk libraries contain multiple optical disks and multiple optical drives HP offers several magneto optical disk library products with various capacity ranges and hardware configurations Each magneto optical disk has two surfaces sides each of which appears to HP UX as if it were an entire disk that can be used for a mountable file system or for raw access Optical disk surfaces may be kept on or off line as use requires You may access simultaneously only as many autochanger surfaces are there are autochanger drives This is a change in implementation SAM will also allow access to only as many surfaces as there are drives Note If you exceed the number of drives the request for the additional surface will either wait sleep without timeouts or it will fail with an EBUSY error indicating the device is currently busy The resultant behavior depends on the specific operation Requests to execute mount mediainit or newfs on surfaces will fail with an EBUSY error when all the drives are used Other commands such as raw access with cpio or dd will wait sleep until a drive is available 5 2 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices Understanding Magneto Optical Media Capacity Magneto optical disk mechanisms suppo
179. marizes their initial configuration requirements All network products require a layered set of software links transports and services whose details fall beyond the scope of this book Consult networking documentation for further information Table 2 11 Network Interfaces and initial Configuration Requirements Card Supported Models Bus Architecture Drivers 25567B Series 700 EISA lan2 LAN 9000 28640 Series 800 HP PB lan3 LAN 9000 36960A Series 800 HP PB pdno X 25Link x25ip x25pa 36967A Series 800 CIO cio_ca0 LANLink lanO A2544A Models 730 750 EISA token1 Apollo TokenRing J2104A Series 700 EISA isdnnetd J2109A isdnx25 HP ISDN Link isdn isdnsn J2069A Series 700 EISA hippi HP HIPPI Link 2 20 Configuring Interface Cards Table 2 11 Network Interfaces and initial Configuration Requirements continued Card Supported Models Bus Architecture Drivers J2146A Series 800 HP PB lan3 LANLink J2156A Series 700 EISA fddi FDDI 9000 J2157A Series 800 HP PB fddi FDDI J2159A Series 700 EISA pdno X 25 9000 x25ip x25pa J2165A Series 700 EISA tokeni HP TokenRing 9000 J2166A Series 800 HP PB token2 HP TokenRing 9000 J2220A Series 800 HP PB psio SNAplus Link sna_router sna_trace sna_access sna_NODE sna_SDLC sna_QLLC sna_Lal J2226A Series 700 EISA psil SNAplus Link sna_router sna_trace sna_access sna_NODE sna_SDLC sna_QLLC sna_Lal
180. mers should not use the CCITT option i option for a UUCP dialer used with access mode 0 and hardware flow control an alternative to XON XOFF pacing The mksf options for the asio0 device driver allows for incoming and outgoing hardware buffering An example of creating modem device special files is provided in Additionally Configuring HP UX for a Modem later in this chapter See the mksf 1M modem 7 and termio 7 manpages in the HP UX Reference for bit values and use Also review Requirements for Modems to Work on HP UX to ensure proper functioning Selecting Device Drivers for Terminals and Modems Use Table 3 1 on the next page to identify the interface and device drivers required to configure a terminal or modem to a serial port For information on increasing the number of available serial ports see Chapter 2 Configuring Interface Cards 3 4 Configuring Terminals and Modems Table 3 1 Serial Configurations for Terminals and Modems Architecture Interface Drivers Device Files H W Flow Cards for terminals Control Series 700 internal asioO dev mux Yes dev tty p 3 Series 800 98190A muxo same as above No CIO 98196A Series 800 40299B mux2 same as above 40299B No HP PB J2092A J2092A No J2093A J2093A No J2094A J2094A Yes J2096A J2096A No A1703 60022 A1703 60022 Yes Series 800 A1703 60003 muxa11 same as above No HP PB 28639
181. mode through SCSI card instance 0 target 6 LUN 0 dev dsk c3t2d4 Entire disk accessed in block mode through HP FL card instance 3 address 2 Unit 4 dev rac c0t0d0_11a Surface 11a of a magneto optical disk whose autochanger in a disk library accessed in raw mode through card instance 0 target 0 LUN 0 dev rmt c1t0OdOBESTnb Tape drive accessed through card instance 1 target 0 LUN 0 Tape writes at best available density format no rewind Berkeley style close dev rmt Omnb Tape drive device special file with identical characteristics linked to dev rmt c1tOdOBESTnb dev floppy c1it3d0 Entire floppy disk drive accessed in block mode through SCSI card instance 1 located in slot 13 with target 3 LUN 0 dev tty0po Serial port of built in card instance 0 port 0 hardwired at address 56 0 accessed through driver mux4 dev c1it0d0_l1p Parallel port on core I O card 1 set to handshake mode 2 dev 1p Parallel port on core I O card 1 set to handshake mode 2 device file is linked to dev cit0d0_lp Both lssf and ioscan commands display the interface to which a device is connected These are discussed in the next sections Getting Started 1 7 Decoding Device Special Files with Issf Use the usr sbin lssf command to decode device special files The following figure compares 11 and 1ssf output Note Throughout this manual examples of commands usage are shown as underlined text 1l dev rdsk c11t2d0 cr
182. n Configuring HP UX for an HP Terminal or for a Modem earlier in this chapter Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 27 Troubleshooting Terminal Problems This section addresses problems with alphanumeric display terminals however the techniques can be applied to problems with terminal emulators such as AdvanceLink or X Windows terminal processes such as hpterm and xterm Unresponsive Terminals Several conditions can cause a terminal not to display any characters except for those it echoes when you type Proceed through these steps working from an active terminal to solve many of them 1 Check the status of the system If the system is still running try resetting the terminal If the system is in single user mode the only active terminal will be the system console other terminals will not respond Switch to a multi user state Consult the init 1m manpage in the HP UX Reference for information on changing run levels Check your system run level as follows who r run level 2 Sep 28 10 07 10 2 0 S The current state of the machine run level 2 in this example is shown in the highlighted field For complete information on each of the fields consult the who 1 manpage 2 Look for an editor running on the terminal Examine the active processes associated with the unresponsive terminal and look for an editor such as an active vi process For example for terminal tty0p1 3 28 Configuring Terminals and M
183. n the file is a character device file Make sure your inittab entries are active To force init to update its initialization tables from etc inittab execute the command init q Make sure the dev muxn and dev tty files are present The dev muxn is the device file associated with the interface card The dev tty is a pseudo device used in many places to refer to the login terminal Check the functionality of your hardware a If the unresponsive terminal has a self test feature activate it If not power the terminal off wait several seconds and power the terminal back on b Swap the unresponsive terminal with one known to be functioning Swap only the terminal and keyboard Attach the properly functioning terminal to the same cable the unresponsive terminal used Plug the Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 31 unresponsive terminal and keyboard to the same cable used by the properly functioning terminal and see if it works there If the properly functioning terminal does not work on the unresponsive terminal s cable and the unresponsive terminal works at the new location the unresponsive terminal is not the problem Check the cable connecting the unresponsive terminal to the computer Swap the suspect cable with a known good one If this solves the problem the cable is bad or is not wired correctly If this does not solve the problem your MUX port or interface card might be malfunctioning On Series 800 multipl
184. n the system Your next task is to configure the LP spooler to enable you to send print jobs to the printer or plotter To do so see Managing Printers and Printer Output in HP UX System Administration Tasks If any necessary driver is absent from the kernel for example if configuring the printer also involves adding an interface card or if you are configuring the printer to an interface not previously used for a printer the ioscan output of a Series 800 might resemble this usr sbin ioscan fn Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description 56 53 UNCLAIMED UNKNOWN HP 28655A Parallel Interface Notice in this example the Driver field for the parallel interface is blank the class and hardware type are unknown and no device special file is displayed Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 15 If the printer driver is absent you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how to do so a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep system_prep writes a system file based on your current kernel in the current directory That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add any absent driver s If you are adding an interface card also make sure to add the interfa
185. ncompatible 6 10 Configuring Tape Drives Allowing for Trial and Error If you are attempting to use a new tape device with the stape driver and you do not know exactly how to configure it you can use the e option to create a device file that will let the driver try several configurations to find one that will work The following shows the command line and resulting device special files usr sbin mksf C tape I 1 e dev rmt c t d eBEST on a system allowing long file names or dev rmt c t d i t on a system requiring short file names Avoiding Data Compression Sometimes an operation requires use of a device special file that writes data without compression For example m On HP UX the STK 3480 tape drive requires that if data cannot be compressed to fewer than 102 400 bytes it must be written to tape without compression 6 a A tape created on an HP35480A will have been written with data compression enabled To read the tape on an HP35470A tape drive you must use a device special file that does not compress data To accomplish this you cannot use the default BEST density because it will automatically compress the data To create device special files for the STK 3480 that write data in uncompressed form use the following sample command Also shown are the resulting device special files usr sbin mksf C tape I 1 b D3480 dev rmt c t d D3480 on a system allowing long file names or dev rmt c t d t
186. nd then your SPU 11 Physically move the disk drive and write down its new hardware location 12 Power up all peripheral devices wait for them to indicate ready and then power on the SPU 13 If you are moving a disk containing the root file system you must change the hardware path that is read from stable storage a Start up your system but override the autoboot Do not boot from the primary or alternate boot path Instead enter Boot Administration mode Note boot ROM administration is system dependent and thus differs for Series 700 and 800 systems The boot ROM menus however are self explanatory Use one of the help commands Help or whenever you are uncertain of what to do b On a Series 700 boot from the new hardware address of your root disk by using the Boot command and proceed to the initial system loader For example BOOT ADMIN gt boot 2 0 1 4 0 isl 4 30 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives On a Series 800 enter the new hardware address of your root disk and boot your system For example if your new hardware address is 52 1 enter b 52 1 Answer Y to the prompt Interact with IPL This will invoke the initial program loader c Set the system s primary boot path in stable storage to the new hardware address by using the primpath command at the ISL gt prompt The system will prompt you to enter the primary boot path d Verify the contents of your AUTO file this t
187. ng Printers and Printer Output in HP UX System Administration Tasks 7 20 Configuring Printers and Plotters Creating a Device Special File for an HP IB Printer When the system boots insf is unable to create default device special files for any printer attached to an EISA HP IB interface You will need to create a character device file using mknod To do so 1 Change directory to dev 2 Determine the major number by invoking the lsdev command You will see that hpib has a character major number of 21 3 Construct a minor number for the device by using the bit assignments for the hpib device driver found in in Appendix C 4 Create the device special file using mknod which has the following syntax usr sbin mknod lt file_name gt blc lt major gt lt minor gt Name the file something easily associated with the device Use c for character device special file Use the character major number reported by lsdev Use the minor number constructed from the bit assignment tables The minor number for hpib has the syntax 0xABCOOO where m Ox is the prefix indicating hexadecimal format m AB is the card instance number m C is the HP IB device Execute ioscan f to identify the card instance number for the EISA HP IB card In the following sample output the card instance number is 3 usr sbin ioscan f d hpib Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus 3 4 0 3 hpib CLAIMED INTERF
188. ng or No Non Volatile Memory NVM Driver rr Added or Moved Board Does Not Work Board Configuration Conflicts Two CFG Files Have the Same Name E ISA Board Power Up Messages B Bus Architectures Series 700 Bus Architecture Model 712 Model 725 100 Model 770 J Series Series 800 Bus Architecture Model E Systems Models F G H I and 8x7 Systems Models 890 and T500 Systems Models 8x9 K Series C Major and Minor Numbers Understanding how the Kernel Associates Drivers to Device Major Numbers Minor Numbers Understanding the Construction of Device Special Files Examples of Minor Number Creation A Minor Number for a MUX Driver A Minor Number for a SCSI Disk Device Adjusting Bits to Read a Floppy Disk Minor Number Bit Assignments Associating a Custom Driver with a Peripheral Creating Device Special Files using mknod Contents 6 Addressing on Multi Function Cards Model E Example A 16 A 18 A 18 A 18 A 19 A 19 A 20 A 21 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 6 B 7 B 7 B 7 B 10 B 11 B 14 C 2 C 3 C 3 C 4 C 6 C 6 C 6 C 7 C 7 C 11 C 16 D Worksheets Interface Cards Terminals and Modems Disk Drives Tape Drives Printers and Plotters Uninterruptible Power Systems UPS Index D 2 D 3 D 4 D 6 D 7 D 8 Contents 7 Figures 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 2 1 2 2 2 3 7 1 7 2 7 3 8 1 8 2 8 3 A 1 B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 B 9 B 10 C
189. nication parameters for the terminal correspond to their etc gettydefs entries Instructions on necessary changes will be discussed in Differences between Console and Terminal Configuration the next section With the configuration complete your terminal should display a login prompt If no login is displayed press Return several times If a prompt fails to appear consult the Troubleshooting Terminal Problems toward the end of this chapter Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 11 Differences between Console and Terminal Configuration As shipped HP terminals are configured properly for use as a system console To use the terminal as a serial terminal the parameters shown in Table 3 2 might require configuration in etc gettydefs Table 3 2 Key Terminal Configuration Parameters Parameter Console Serial Terminal Serial Terminal as shipped hard wired via modem Data bits 8 8 7 Parity no no even Default speed 9600 9600 300 1 These are the parameters set for the H entry in etc gettydefs and can be used for terminal configuration in etc inittab 2 Sending a will cause the speed to change in the sequence shown in etc gettydefs Running Screen Oriented Applications on a Terminal To run screen oriented applications such as SAM or swinstall on a terminal that is not being used as a console you can use the H setting in etc gettydefs As shown in Table 3 2 this will giv
190. ns described in Limitations to Non HP Terminal Emulation Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 13 Configuring a DEC 420 Terminal to Emulate VT100 or VT320 Mode The DEC VT100 and VT320 terminals will work in their default settings with HP UX For a VT420 terminal to work in HP UX it must be configured to emulate either a VT100 or VT320 terminal as follows 1 Install the hardware as described in the terminal s manual 2 Enter set up mode by pressing the F3 key a b c Select Default and press Return Select General and press Return Set the Mode m To emulate a VT320 select VT400 Mode 7 bit Controls m To emulate a VT100 press Return until the selection reads VT100 Mode Set the ID a To emulate a VT320 select VT320 ID a To emulate a VT100 select VT100 ID Return to the main settings and save the configuration Then press the F3 key to exit set up mode Table 3 3 shows the correct values for a Model VT420 terminal set up to emulate a VT 100 3 14 Configuring Terminals and Modems Table 3 3 Configuration Values for vt 100 Compatibility Global Set Up On Line 1 Comm1 CRT Saver Printer Shared 70 Hz Display Set Up 80 Columns Interpret Controls No Auto Wrap Smooth 2 Scroll Dark Screen Cursor Block Cursor Style No_Status_Display Cursor_Blink 6x24 Pages 24 Lines Screen Vertical Coupling Page Coupling No Auto Resize Screen Communications Set Up Comm
191. ocumented in the previous section and remove any invalid references 2 Add Series 800 LVM disks to a 10 0 system by importing the LVM information as documented in Configuring into your System an LVM Disk Already Containing Data 4 16 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Configuring into your System an Unpartitioned Disk Already Containing Data Note This procedure is provided for configuring a Series 700 legacy disk into HP UX 10 0 Before proceeding make sure you have read Planning to Configure into your System a Disk Already Containing Data and have performed the examination documented in Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 1 Back up the data on the disk being configured into the system see the backup chapter in HP UX System Administration Tasks 2 Create a record of the system s current disk configuration for later use usr sbin ioscan fun C disk Note whether the current configuration includes the device driver needed to communicate with the disk you intend to configure Consult Selecting Device Drivers for a Disk Device and Interface for guidelines on compatible disks device drivers and interfaces If any necessary device driver is absent from the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how you rebuild the kernel a Change directory to the build environment stand build Execute a system preparation script system_prep
192. odems etc fuser dev tty0p1 or ps t ttyOpi f If you find an active editor process running at the terminal it is probably in a text entry mode You will need to save the work to a temporary file and exit the editor If you are not sure of the status of the work being edited do not simply save the file and exit You will overwrite the previous contents of the file with unknown text Save the work in progress to a temporary file so that both the original and edited versions of the file are accessible If all else fails kill the editor process from the console as described in step 8 Enter cirl Q at the terminal keyboard If output to the unresponsive terminal was stopped because an XOFF signal Ctrl S was sent from the terminal to the computer you can restart it by sending an XON signal Ctrl Q If an application program is looping or functioning improperly press the Break key and then Ctrl C to attempt to regain a shell prompt If the unresponsive terminal uses something other than Ctrl C as the interrupt character you can identify it by logging into another terminal and executing the command stty a against the device special file of the unresponsive terminal Use the stty command only with device file names for currently active terminal device files Use who to see which device files are active Executing stty with an inactive device file will hang the terminal from which you enter the c
193. of ioscan In its simplest form usr sbin ioscan displays hardware path device class and description The u usable devices or k kernel structures options give fastest response because they do not probe the hardware Figure 1 2 shows devices on a Series 800 Model E connected through the HP PB bus converter at address 56 The 56 52 is the address of the single ended SCSI interface The shaded digits below are the addresses already being used on the card Note that there is no 56 52 4 0 If you attach another SCSI device to this card you can set its address to 4 usr sbin ioscan k H W Path Class Description Bus Converter ext_bus HP 28655A SCSI Interface target tape SCSI Tape target disk HP C2247M1 SCSI Disk target disk HP C2247M1 SCSI Disk target disk TEAC FC 1 SCSI Disk target disk HP C2247M1 SCSI Disk target disk HP C2247M1 SCSI Disk 0 OQ 1 a 2 2o 3 3 5 ob 6 6 Figure 1 2 Excerpted Terse ioscan Output from a Series 800 Model E Getting Started 1 9 Understanding Hardware Addresses You can identify each piece of hardware configured to an HP UX computer by its hardware address shown in ioscan as H W Path The length of these numerical sequences differ by system model and architecture but every hardware path leads you through the bus structure starting from the bus closest to the system processor and ending at the output device ioscan H hardware_path shows you the
194. om ioscan output Use the cabling recommended in the hardware documentation If installing a SCSI device make sure the last device in the SCSI chain is terminated 7 Turn on the power to all peripheral devices Wait for them to become ready then turn on power to the SPU 4 12 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives On booting up HP UX detects the new disk and associates it with its device driver Also during boot up insf creates the character and block device special dev files required to communicate with the disk For a disk array in independent mode insf creates device special files for each disk in striped mode insf treats the entire array as a single disk Verify the configuration by executing ioscan If you are configuring a hard disk you have finished the initial configuration If you are configuring a floppy disk drive initialize the floppy disk by invoking the mediainit command on the character device special file Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 13 Planning to Configure into your System a Disk Already Containing Data When configuring a new disk onto either Series 700 or 800 system both SAM and insf now treat the disk in its entirety and create a single block device special file in dev dsk and a single character device special file in dev rdsk As of HP UX 10 0 to apportion disk space on both Series 700 and 800 systems use Logical Volume Manager LVM whi
195. ommand For example stty a lt dev ttyOp1 Compare the baud rate shown in the stty output and that set on the terminal They should match Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 29 4 Reset the terminal On an HP terminal try a soft reset of Shift Reset If the terminal is stuck in an unusable state power the terminal off wait for a few seconds and power it back on This will reset the terminal though the terminal owner s manual may have information on a better way to do it You also might need to set the tabs with the tabs command 5 On an HP terminal use the menu keys to examine the modes configuration a Is the terminal in Remote mode It should be b Is Block mode turned ON If so turn it OFF c Is Line mode turned ON If so turn it OFF d Is Modify mode turned ON If so turn it OFF 6 Check the physical connection of the terminal to ensure that all cables are firmly attached and properly located all interface cards are firmly seated the power cord is firmly connected and the power switch is turned on 7 Send a short ASCII file to the unresponsive terminal s device file Execute this in the background to retain the current terminal s responsiveness For example for an unresponsive terminal associated with the device file ttyd1p4 cat etc motd gt dev ttydip4 amp If you have solved the problem you will see the contents of the file etc motd displayed on the terminal associated with d
196. ompatibilities with HP UX 10 0 1 Examine the files on the 9 x disk to make absolutely sure you do not mount system directories and structural files System directories include usr dev etc system bin and lib Structural files include files such as etc checklist and dfile Never attempt to use 9 x device special files on a 10 2 system They will fail Delete or rename any system files and directories you find 2 Examine user scripts for occurrences of 9 z specific path names and commands that are invalid or obsolete for 10 0 Do this before mounting the 9 2 disk HP has some tools on 10 0 to help identify and correct changed or unsupported path names These tools are shipped in the following filesets m Upgrade UPG ANALYSIS m Upgrade UPG MAN On a 10 0 system the tools are installed in the opt upgrade bin directory The manpages are installed in opt upgrade share man If you have obtained the filesets to be loaded onto an 9 x system the filesets will be installed into upgrade bin and usr man Consult the manual Moving HP UX 9 x Code and Scripts to 10 x Using the Analysis and Conversion Tools and the upgrade manpages for further guidance on preparing 9 x files for HP UX 10 0 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 15 Understanding How to Configure a Disk Already Containing Data Accessing 9 2 data might require that you configure one of the following 9 x disk types to HP UX 10 0 m Series
197. onfiguration Configuring E ISA Boards Using Interactive Mode You might need to run eisa_config interactively for the following reasons m You need to add remove or move an ISA board which do not have readable ID registers and thus are not automatically recognized by eisa_config m eisa_config exited from automatic mode with an error message requiring you to change the choice for a function See Changing Choices for Board Functions shortly m You want to change the choice that eisa_config automatically selected for a function m ecisa_config exited from automatic mode with an error message requiring you to add a board interactively a You might want to view your E ISA configuration for planning purposes Note Always run eisa_config interactively before physically changing the configuration EISA Board Configuration A 5 Sample Interactive Session to Add an E ISA Card Starting eisa_config Invoke eisa_config which begins by displaying the current board configuration sbin eisa_config HP UX E ISA CONFIGURATION UTILITY Type q or quit to leave eisa_config Type or help for help on eisa_config commands CFG File Contents HWPCO10 HP Series 700 EISA System Board XYZ1401 XYZ SCSI Controller EMPTY XYZ1702 XYZ Centronics Interface EMPTY On Line Help Note that eisa_config has self explanatory on line help Type or help at an EISA prompt and read the entries to acquaint yours
198. onfiguration Guidelines Series 700 does not accept HP IB disks Up to four HP IB disks can be configured for each Series 800 HP IB interface card Table 4 1 lists the device drivers required for configuring an HP IB disk or CD ROM for each supported interface Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 5 Table 4 1 HP IB Disk Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Series 800 CIO 27110B hpibo dev r dsk c t d s 27113B disci Series 800 HP PB 28650B hpibi same as above disci 1 The following disk drives can be configured to a Series 800 high speed HP IB interface 7907A 7914CT P 7933H 7935H 7936H 7937H 7957A B 7958A B 7959B 7962B 9262B 9263B 97902B 97903B 97962B C1707A C2200A C2203A The following disk drives can be configured to a Series 800 medium speed HP IB interface 7963B 9127A Models shown in parenthesis are obsolete and are listed for reference only 2 Specifying hpibO causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included automatically into the kernel 3 c t d s derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the disk is attached t is the address of the device on the interface d is the device unit number s specifies section number and is provided for backward compatibility the entire disk s0 is assumed wh
199. onfiguration includes the device driver s needed to communicate with the disk you intend to configure Consult the tables Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 19 in Selecting Device Drivers for a Disk Device and Interface for guidelines on compatible disks device drivers and interfaces If any necessary device driver is absent from the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how you rebuild the kernel a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep system_prep writes a system file based on your current kernel in the current directory That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system 4 20 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives mv stand build syste
200. onfigured to the port a A device special file must be created to communicate through the port m A getty process must be run against the terminal port to solicit logins For procedures on configuring terminals and modems attached to HP terminal controllers DTCs on the network refer to the following resources a Using the HP DTC Manager UX part number J2120 62000 for managing terminals and modems from a host HP UX system a Using HP OpenView DTC Manager part number D2355 90001 for managing terminals and modems from a personal computer m documentation accompanying your third party terminal server For procedures to configure X terminals and modems attached to an X terminal see HP VUE 3 0 User s Guide part number B1171 90061 Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 1 Planning to Configure a Terminal or Modem Plan ahead before configuring a terminal or modem Read the hardware documentation shipped with the peripheral device and understand what you need to do before getting started Planning to Configure a Port for a Terminal Consider the following a Are you configuring the device directly to a serial RS 232 C port or to a terminal server through the LAN a Will other users be affected by the configuration If so notify them before you bring the system down m Observe HP recommendations concerning maximum recommended cabling distances and maximum number of terminals per interface m Decide whether you will be
201. only Resale of the programs in their present form or with alterations is expressly prohibited Copyright Notices copyright 1983 95 Hewlett Packard Company all rights reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation of this document without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws copyright 1979 1980 1983 1985 93 Regents of the University of California This software is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution under license from the Regents of the University of California copyright 1980 1984 1986 Novell Inc copyright 1986 1992 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright 1985 86 1988 Massachusetts Institute of Technology copyright 1989 93 The Open Software Foundation Inc copyright 1986 Digital Equipment Corporation copyright 1990 Motorola Inc copyright 1990 1991 1992 Cornell University copyright 1989 1991 The University of Maryland copyright 1988 Carnegie Mellon University Trademark Notices UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology MS DOS and Microsoft are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation OSF Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation Inc in the U S and other countries Printing History The manual printing date and part number indicate its
202. ons Host Computer Device Cable Suggested Connection Connection DTE 4F DCE 25F Not recommended for DCEs Use 92219T 17255 D DTE 4F DTE 25F 92219T DTE 4F DTE 25M 92219T 92224F adapter DTE 9F DCE 25F 92221M or 98561 61604 40242M DTE 9F DTE 25F 92221P or 98561 61604 40242G DTE 9F DTE 25M 98561 61604 402420 DTE 9M DCE 25F 24542M or 98574 61606 92221M or 98574 61606 98561 61604 40242M DTE 9M DTE 25F 24542G or 98574 61606 92221P or 98574 61606 98561 61604 40242G DTE 9M DTE 25M 24542H or 98574 61606 98561 61604 40242C DCE 25F DCE 25F 40242G DCE 25F DTE 25F 40242M or 92224M adapter if cables present DCE 25F DTE 25M 40242C or connect directly if cables present DCE 25F DCE 25F 92219Q DTE 25F DCE 25F 40242M or 92224M adapter if cables present DTE 25F DTE 25F 40242G DTE 25F DTE 25M 17255D DTE 50F DCE 25F 5061 4215 DTE 50F DTE 25F 5061 4216 92224M DTE 50F DTE 25M 5061 4216 1 F denotes female receptacle M male plug 4 denotes USOC RJ 11C connector as on contemporary consumer telephones 9 denotes 9 pin DB 0 subminiature D style connector 25 denotes 25 pin DB 25 subminiature D style connector 50 denotes 50 pin amp blue ribbon D style connector 2 10 Configuring Interface Cards Centronics Parallel Configuration Guidelines The centronics parallel interface allows characters to transfer over multiple data lines one
203. out the board and its switches the interface functions and choices Correcting a Mistake While Using eisa_config If you have made changes in the configuration that you want to undo you can return to the current session s initial configuration by using the init command Type the following command init system sci A 8 EISA Board Configuration If you specify system sci eisa_config retrieves the configuration from that file otherwise it retrieves it from non volatile memory NVM Displaying Board Information Type a show command to ask for information on the board in slot 2 eisa_config displays the board s basic attributes and indicates the currently selected choice for each function EISA show board 2 XYZ Networking Board CFG file XYZ1802 CFG Slot 2 The XYZ Networking board is an IEEE 802 3 local area networking board for use with twisted pair cabling ID oe eee cece eee Board type eee eee Board slot type Readable ID 4 Skirt oo eee eee eee Function names and possible choices StarLAN 10 PC LAN Adapter F1 I O Base Address CH1 300h current CH2 340h CH3 240h F2 Loopback Mode CH1 Normal operation current CH2 Test mode F3 Interrupt Channel IRQ CH1 3 CH2 4 CH3 5 current CH4 7 XYZ Computer Corp WET Network Board 330 millimeters EISA Board Configuration A 9 Changing Choices for Boa
204. own grace period Thus to ensure that the UPS provides power for the entire operation figure maximum shutdown_delay_mins as fifteen minus six or a difference of nine minutes shutdown_timeout_mins five minutes by default is the number of minutes shutdown h is expected to take UPS terminates power supply one minute after this value elapses If shutdown does not complete in the time specified the UPS monitor initiates a reboot h to halt the system Increase shutdown_timeout_mins if shutdown takes longer than five minutes including the one minute grace period Decrease shutdown_timeout_mins if shutdown takes less than five minutes Small systems can take advantage of this Caution You must wait the full duration of shutdown_timeout_mins before cycling power to the SPU regardless of whether AC power has been restored Once activated the UPS will turn off after that period of time 8 8 Figure 8 3 Guidelines for Setting Shutdown Options Configuring Uninterruptible Power Systems b If you are configuring more than one UPS list their device special files on separate lines in priority order Make sure the most important UPS that is for the SPUs is the first one listed c Ifa UPS governs peripheral devices and external bus extenders it should be configured to send and log messages but not to initiate a system shutdown To use this option set upstty for that UPS to MSG_ONLY If you are using SAM MSG_ONLY is re
205. p script writes a system file in your current directory that is it creates stand build system The v gives verbose explanation as the script executes b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the command Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 11 usr sbin mk_kernel s system The mk_kernel command creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 3 Notify users that the system will be shut down to configure the disk You can use the wall command and or the interactive capabilities of the shutdown command to broadcast a message to users before the system goes down See wall 1M or shutdown 1M in the HP UX Reference 4 Bring the system down to a halt using the shutdown command 5 Turn off the power to all peripheral devices and then to the SPU 6 Install the hardware following instructions provided in the hardware documentation When attaching the disk set the switches on the disk to an unused target address which you will have determined fr
206. pherals a DTC 72MX communications server J2070A providing LAN telnet access X 25 access and connection for up to 72 serial connected peripherals via an asynchronous processor board DTCs must be configured by one of two DTC software products HP OpenView DTC Manager HP part number D2355A and HP DTC Manager UX HP part number J2120A both of which can be used with HP UX systems Consult your HP Sales Representative for full information 2 8 Configuring Interface Cards RS 232 C Cabling Guidelines For cabling purposes serial devices may be thought of as Data Communications Equipment DCE or Data Terminal Equipment DTE Historically DCEs were modems and DTEs were whatever terminated the data path typically a terminal at one end and computer at the other When transmitting remotely the circuit may be shown diagramically as follows with the active pins listed in Table 2 4 Computer DTE DCE phone lines DCE DTE terminal Table 2 4 DCE and DTE Pin Assignments DCE pins DTE pins Transmit 3 2 Receive 2 3 Monitor 4 20 5 6 8 22 Assert 5 6 8 22 4 20 Ground 7 7 1 For simple serial I O only transmit receive and ground are required Table 2 5 provides a quick reference to RS 232 C cabling between serial devices and an HP UX system Neither RS 422 nor direct CPU to CPU connections are tabulated Configuring Interface Cards 2 9 Table 2 5 RS 232 C Interconnecti
207. r choice or suggests switch settings to resolve the conflict A 2 EISA Board Configuration BOARD ID HWPOC80 NAME HP EISA SCSI host adapter 255254 MFR Hewlett Packard Co IOCHECK INVALID DISABLE SUPPORTED COMMENTS This init file performs the following Sets the ABRT to 1 in 0zC85 Sets the RIEN to O in 0zC85 FUNCTION BOOT ROM ENABLE RELOCATION CHOICE ENABLED LINK MEMORY 32K ADDRESS OD8000h OC8000h ODO0000h MEMTYPE OTH WRITABLE NO INIT IOPORT 6 LOC 7 6 00 10 01 CHOICE DISABLED FREE INIT IOPORT 6 LOC 7 6 11 FUNCTION Host Adapter SCSI ID Selection CHOICE SCSI ID 7 FREE INIT IOPORTC7 10000000 CHOICE SCSI ID 6 FREE INIT IOPORTC7 01000000 Figure A 1 A Sample CFG File If the default function must be changed refer to Changing Choices for Board Functions later in this appendix for selecting a board function sbin eisa_config writes its configuration to non volatile memory NVM and to a system sci file which can be used to create identical configurations For the procedure see Creating Identical E ISA Configurations on Other Workstations later in this appendix EISA Board Configuration A 3 Configuring the Software Required by the E ISA Board You install an E ISA interface board much like installing any other board by following the procedures detailed in Chapter 3 Configuring Interface Cards However se
208. r example 7 19 C2001A 7 9 7 13 C2010A 7 6 7 9 7 11 parallel centronics configuration requirements 7 11 C2011A 7 11 SCSI configuration requirements 7 13 C2021A 7 11 serial RS 232 C configuration C2040A 7 11 requirements 7 9 C2106A 7 9 7 11 7 13 C2113A 7 9 7 11 C2114A 7 11 7 13 printers and plotters choosing means of access 7 2 configuring 7 1 30 C2121A 7 11 hardware concerns 7 4 C2225C P 7 11 local and remote access 7 2 C2225D 7 9 moving 7 27 C2227A 7 9 7 11 C2228A 7 9 7 11 C2235A 7 11 C22354 B C D 7 9 network access 7 3 selecting device drivers 7 5 software concerns 7 4 TSM access 7 3 C2276A 7 9 7 11 via DTCs 7 8 C2277A 7 9 7 11 priority of backplane slots 2 3 C2354A 7 9 problems C2356A 7 9 7 11 with terminals 3 28 3 32 C2562A C 7 9 procedures C2562C 7 11 C2563A B C 7 9 7 11 C2564B C 7 9 7 11 C2565A 7 9 7 11 C2566A B C 7 9 C2566B C 7 11 Index 18 configuring a DEC420 to emulate VT100 mode 3 14 16 configuring a disk device 4 11 configuring a magneto optical disk 5 5 configuring a magneto optical disk library 5 7 configuring an unpartitioned disk with existing data 4 17 configuring a partitioned disk with existing data 4 19 configuring a port for a modem connection 3 6 configuring a port for a terminal connection 3 6 configuring a tape drive 6 7 configuring a Wyse 60 terminal as HP console 3 18 19 configuring LVM disk 4
209. r to other HP IB devices only in a daisy chained arrangement HP IB cable is available in the following lengths HP 10833A 1 0 meter HP 10833B 2 0 meter HP 10833C 4 0 meter HP 10833D 0 5 meter Cabling of medium speed devices is limited to two meters per device or 20 meters total whichever is less Cabling of high speed devices is limited to one meter per device or 10 meters total whichever is less Transmission distance between an HP IB interface and peripheral devices can be extended to a maximum of 1 25km using the HP 37204A Multipoint HP IB extender with coaxial or fiber optic cable Consult your HP Sales Representative for information Changing HP IB Address Switch Settings 1 First shut down and halt the system using usr sbin shutdown h turn off the computer and its battery backup if equipped and unplug its power cord Then turn off the peripheral device Change the switch settings on the device Turn on the device Turn on your system oe W bd Configuring Interface Cards 2 19 Networking Configuration Guidelines HP Series 700 and 800 systems shipped with LAN ports on the personality multi functional or core I O boards provide network access through AUI LAN ThinLAN or EtherTwist Note the two ports on the standard LAN personality card are mutually exclusive you can use either but not both ports simultaneously Additional networking options are available for HP UX systems Table 2 11 sum
210. r uses the minor number to locate the specific device and for information regarding how to handle data C 2 Major and Minor Numbers Major Numbers The major number is an index for the device driver into one of two kernel tables bdevsw the block device switch table and cdevsw the character device switch table Drivers that support both block and character I O such as SCSI disk driver and optical autochanger have both a block major number and a character major number Devices that support only character mode access have only a character major number The core hpux file in usr conf master d contains a Driver install table which lists major numbers for reference only To identify valid major numbers for devices configured on your system you can execute the lsdev command 1sdev reads the driver headers and lists the drivers configured into the kernel with their block and character major numbers If the driver is designed to use a dynamically assigned major number lsdev displays the assigned major number Major numbers are displayed in decimal form The 1 designation in either character or block major number field of lsdev output can mean m The device might be a module that is not a driver a No driver is configured a Driver is not supported in that block or character mode Minor Numbers Minor numbers represent two kinds of information the location of the interface to which a device is attached and driver dependent cha
211. racteristics This information is organized by specific bit assignments The tables later in this Appendix show the bit assignments for many HP UX device drivers You can also consult the device driver manpage in section 7 of the HP UX Reference For non HP drivers consult the documentation provided with the driver Major and Minor Numbers C 3 Understanding the Construction of Device Special Files A long listing 1s 1 of a typical device special file might look like this crw 2 bin bin 193 0x010200 Jul 12 02 19 tty1p2 The two shaded fields are the major 193 decimal and minor 0x010200 hexadecimal numbers Both major and minor number are encoded into a numerical designation of the device driver called the dev_t format This is shown in Figure C 2 Note PA RISC uses Big Endian byte ordering that is the bit labelled O is the most significant high order bit Figure C 2 Driver Number dev_t Format Bits 0 through 7 of an HP UX device special file are used to encode the major number Bits 8 through 31 are used to encode the minor number The hexadecimal notation for the minor number follows the format OxNNNNNN in which each four C 4 Major and Minor Numbers bits shown as N or nibble is represented by a hexadecimal digit 0 through F in which 0 means no bits are set F means all bits are set Bits 8 through 15 encode the card instance of the interface card that is the number representing
212. rd Functions If eisa_config cannot automatically generate a new configuration with the choices currently selected you can use the change command to specify an alternative choice for a particular function on a board A board must already be part of the configuration before you can use the change command on it Use the change command cautiously because it overrides any choice eisa_config might make even to resolve a conflict To change a choice for a given function issue the change command specifying the slot number function number F and the new choice number CH as shown by the show board slot command EISA change slot function choice After making all desired changes within eisa_config exit the program as explained in the next section A 10 EISA Board Configuration Exiting eisa_config Once you have changed the configuration eisa_config prompts you to m save the changes and exit m exit without saving changes or m abort the exit When you save the changes eisa_config displays a list of subsequent steps EISA quit A description of the configuration was saved in var adm eisa config log If eisa_config was run per the instructions of a specific product installation manual refer to that manual for specifics on device file creation and I 0 drivers Step 4 may apply if other cards were affected Otherwise the following is a list of generally required steps 1 Make any necessary device files
213. re B 9 ioscan Output from a Model T500 Bus Architectures B 13 Models 8x9 K Series Models 829 share features in common with the Model 770 J Series dual GSC buses and multiple graphics capability In addition the K Series systems also provide HP PB buses This allows for both WSIO and SIO functionality on the same computer Figure B 10 illustrates the bus relationships also included is excerpted ioscan output Figure B 10 Model 8x9 K Series Bus Relationships B 14 Bus Architectures H W Path Description 10 0 10 0 6 10 0 6 0 10 4 10 4 0 10 8 10 12 10 12 0 10 12 5 10 12 6 10 12 7 10 16 32 38 49 ext_bus target disk tty ext_bus ext_bus ext_bus lan ps2 be processor processor memory I O Adapter I O Adapter GSC built in Fast Wide SCSI Interface HP C2247WD Bus Converter MUX GSC add on Fast Wide SCSI Interface Core I 0 Adapter Built in Parallel Interface Built in SCSI Built in LAN Built in Keyboard Mouse Bus Converter Processor Processor Memory Bus Architectures B 15 C Major and Minor Numbers This appendix addresses special situations in which HP UX does not configure a driver automatically or create the required device special files For example you might need to configure a custom driver for black box or instrumentation applications If the proper code is present in the driver insf can create device special files automatically and HP UX can
214. re on how to change strapping Execute another ps ef grep ttyd2p5 command to verify that getty is still in a pending state If getty has a port number in the tty field instead of a question mark the modem has carrier detect CD strapped high Check the modem users manual for procedure on how to change strapping At this point the modem is ready for call in use To set up the modem for call out use you must add entries to the etc uucp Devices file This file does not have an associated manpage follow the examples given in the file itself Edit etc uucp Devices to include an entry for the dev culnpp file created earlier For example ACU cul2p5 2400 hayes Direct cul2p5 2400 direct After saving the file you can test the modem s call out ability executing the following cu command usr bin cu s2400 lcul2p5 dir You should get a message indicating that you are connected If you enter AT Return the system will respond with OK If it does not the modem might have its echo turned off Enter ATDTtelephone_number and listen to Configuring Terminals and Modems 3 25 the modem to hear if it dials If the modem does not dial refer to your modem user s manual or have the modem hardware checked out The modem is now ready for call out using cu s2400 telephone_number Requirements for Modems to Work on HP UX Your modem hardware documentation will be your primary resource for setting switch positions an
215. recognize the device but you might still have to create a customized device special file for the instrument to work properly To configure HP UX for non standard device drivers or devices you may need to 1 Configure the custom driver into the kernel 2 Create device special files for the device using either mksf or mknod commands Tables in this Appendix provide you with the information to construct a minor number for any HP device driver You should also consult the manpages in Section 7 of the HP UX Reference for the type of device driver you are configuring For non HP drivers consult the documentation provided with the device Major and Minor Numbers C 1 Understanding how the Kernel Associates Drivers to Device The kernel communicates with the hardware by associating the driver name with a hardware address The kernel identifies the drivers it needs from the stand system file and finds them using the files in the usr conf master d directory All standard HP UX interface and device drivers shipped are located in the library usr conf lib libhp ux a The kernel recognizes interface and device drivers and by extension peripheral devices by major and minor numbers encoded into the device special files Figure C 1 Device Special Files Contain Major and Minor Numbers Each device driver in the system is assigned a major number which the kernel uses to locate the driver routine to service an I O request The drive
216. ripheral devices and then to the computer Reboot the system As the system reboots HP UX automatically creates the necessary device special files required for the peripheral At least one device special file must exist for the device driver to communicate with the peripheral device Device special files tell the operating system which device driver to use how to find the peripheral device and what special characteristics the peripheral device employs Figure 1 1 The Essentials of Peripheral Configuration 1 2 Getting Started Tip Often if you anticipate having to add a new external peripheral device you can configure the device drivers into the kernel at a time when no one else is on the system Then when the peripheral arrives you can physically install it with minimal user disruption Using SAM to Configure Peripherals The HP UX System Administration Manager SAM provides the easiest way to m view your system s configuration m configure the peripheral device s drivers into the kernel m regenerate the kernel after configuring the software To invoke SAM type usr sbin sam SAM s user interface and online help system allow you to discover the configuration information as you proceed through its screens Once you provide SAM with basic information about the device being configured m SAM checks your currently running kernel configuration file for the required device drivers m reports whether or no
217. ription Number Adapter to Peripheral SCSI Cables K2296 1 0 m High density HD screw to low density LD bail lock male male K22971 1 5 m HD screw to LD bail lock male male Peripheral to Peripheral SCSI Cables 92222A 0 5 m LD bail lock male male 92222B 1 0 m LD bail lock male male 92222C 2 0 m LD bail lock male male SCSI Extender Cables 92222D 1 0 m LD male female C2900A 3 0 m LD bail lock male female C2901A 5 0 m LD bail lock male female C2902A 10 0 m LD bail lock male female C2903A 20 0 m LD bail lock male female C2906A 2 0 m LD male male 1 This is a replacement number for the SCSI cable included with the host adapter 2 Recommended for use with HP EISA cards 3 SCSLII 50 pin to SCSLIII 68 pin cable to connect Series 700 workstations to C2425J JK 024275 JK Cabling options can be ordered for the HP fast wide differential host adapter HP 28696A to extend standard cabling and for SwitchOver configurations 2 24 Configuring Interface Cards V cables male male male to daisy chain multiple hosts Table 2 15 show additional cables available to connect a Fast Wide SCSI adapter to peripheral or peripheral to peripheral Table 2 15 Fast Wide SCSI Cables Product Length Product Compatibility Number C2911A 0 9 m C2425 K C2427 K C3034T C3035T C3036T C2924A 2 5 m C3034T C3035T C3036T C2925A 10 0 m C3034T C3035T C3036T C2926A 20 0 m C3034T C3035T C3036T The HP 28643A SCSI Fiber Op
218. rm 4 terminfo 4 ttytype 4 environ 5 modem 7 pty 7 termio 7 tty 7 Permit or deny messages to a terminal File paginator for video terminals Set options for a terminal port Set tabs on a terminal User interface to the telnet protocol Generate terminal specific functions Terminal dependent initialization Terminal Session Manager Get the name of the terminal or pseudo terminal Terminal identification program Convert a termcap description into a terminfo description Dedicated port parser used by DDFA software Set terminal type modes speed line discipline Make special files Remote login server terminal escape sequence terminfo compiler terminal escape sequence terminfo extractor Set terminal type modes speed line discipline Speed and terminal settings used by getty Format of compiled terminal file Terminal capability database Database of terminal types by port User environment variables Asynchronous serial modem line control Pseudo terminal driver General terminal interface Controlling terminal interface The following manuals provide additional information Terminal Control User s Guide Using Serial Connections Technical Guide Terminal Session Manager User s Guide DTC Device File Access Utilities and Telnet Port Identification 3 34 Configuring Terminals and Modems 4 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives This chapter gives procedures and guidelines for configuring h
219. rt several different capacities m Cl7exA and C17xxC products support 1X capacity disks a Cl7zzT and ClizrA products support 1X and 2X capacity disks HP UX supports disks with 512 or 1024 bytes per sector for both 1X and 2X capacity Disks with 1024 bytes per sector give more storage space per disk due to a smaller amount of sector overhead Table 5 1 Magneto Optical Media Capacity by Size Sector Size Total Size Total Size 1X Capacity 2X Capacity 512 bytes 600 MB 1 2 GB 1024 bytes 650 MB 1 3 GB 5 You can determine the media by executing the diskinfo command diskinfo output for magneto optical disks shows the information for the specific surface queried not for the disk as a whole The size in this example corresponds to the number of bytes on one surface of a 1X capacity magneto optical disk with a sector size of 1024 bytes A 2X capacity magneto optical disk would show 581668 Kbytes usr sbin diskinfo dev rac cO0t1d0_4a SCSI describe of dev rac c0tid0_4a vendor HP product id C1716T type optical memory size 314568 Kbytes bytes per sector 1024 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 5 3 Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Guidelines This section identifies the device drivers that must be configured into HP UX for it to communicate with single magneto optical disks If you are configuring a magneto optical disk brary or adding an optical disk to an existing magneto optical disk
220. running uucp on the device m Invoke usr sbin ioscan f before beginning your configuration to figure out to which interface card or MUX you are adding the terminal or modem Note which ports are already used Attempt to distribute the peripherals among your cards if possible HP systems are shipped so that you can use the HP console terminal immediately after plugging it into an SPU The simplest way to configure any HP terminal or a modem is to use the System Administration Manager usr sbin sam SAM s self explanatory menus and help system prompt you for all the software requirements to ensure the terminal or modem is configured properly and with appropriate security settings If SAM is not loaded on your system or if you prefer to use the command line interface the following procedure will guide you through the task Familiarize yourself with the instructions before getting started 3 2 Configuring Terminals and Modems Planning to Configure a non HP Terminal Note As of 10 0 HP provides limited support for non HP terminals Their configuration and limitations are discussed in the section Configuring a Non HP Terminal as a Console later in this 3 chapter The following non standard terminal emulations are provided for HP UX DEC VT100 VT320 VT420 terminals in VT100 or VT320 modes Wyse 60 HP terminal 700 60 in VT100 VT320 and Wyse 60 modes Note the less expensive DEC and Wyse terminals lack certain c
221. rved Section number disc4 SCSI target or HP FL device SCSI LUN or HP FL unit always 0 Reserved Section number sdisk SCSI target SCSI LUN Reserved Disk partition number sflop SCSI target SCSI LUN Reserved 0 3 5in 1 44MB drive geom determined default 1 3 5in 1 44MB drive no geom determined SoftPC 2 3 5in 720KB drive geom determined 3 3 5in 720KB drive no geom determined 4 3 5in 2 88MB drive geom determined 5 3 5in 2 88MB drive no geom determined 6 not supported 7 not supported 8 5 25in 1 2MB drive geom determined 8 5 25in 360KB drive geom determined 9 5 25in 1 2MB drive no geom determined 9 5 25in 360KB drive no geom determined schgr autoxO SCSI target 20 22 SCSI LUN 23 31 Surface C 8 Major and Minor Numbers Table C 4 Bit Assignments for Serial Network and Line Printer Devices bits 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 asioO 16 17 Receive Reserved 24 Card diagnostic 28 Reserved fifo trigger level bit 29 Protocol 18 19 Transmit 25 Reserved 0 Bell 1 CCITT fifo limit 26 Reserved 30 31 Access mode 27 Hardware flow 00 Direct control enable 01 Dial out modem 10 Dial in modem muxO 16 23 Port number 24 Card diagnostic 28 Reserved mux2 bit 29 Protocol mux4 25 Port diagnostic 0 Bell 1 CCITT bit 30 31 Access mode 26 Reserved 00 Direct 27 Hardware flow 01 Dial ou
222. s 6 11 exports 4 4 26 4 34 ext_bus and instance number 1 12 extracting the system file 1 15 2 29 3 7 411 417 4 20 4 23 4 29 5 7 6 7 7 16 7 24 C 11 F fddi 2 21 fiber optic extender cable for SCSI 2 25 field separators 1 10 fifo bits C 8 Index file CFG A 2 etc eisa config log A 13 fileset for disk array configuration 4 3 file system layout 4 14 file type C 2 floppy 7 4 4 floppy disk drives adjusting minor number bits C 7 configuration guidelines 4 10 configuration planning 4 4 device special files created 4 10 floppy disks and HP UX capability for mounted file system 4 4 differences from PC floppies 4 4 intended use and limitations 4 4 force configuration C 11 force configuration of device drivers C 11 formats handling differences on tape media 6 10 framebuf 2 13 fstab 4 4 19 4 32 full ioscan listing 1 13 further tasks disk drives 4 38 magneto optical devices 5 11 tape drives 6 13 fuser 1M 3 29 G garbage data on terminals 3 28 3 32 geometry determined C 8 getty 7 8 modem entry in etc inittab described 3 24 getty 1M 3 1 3 12 3 24 3 31 key options for terminals 3 10 Index 9 gettydefs 4 3 11 3 12 3 33 H setting for hard wired terminals 3 12 glitches preventing tape data loss due to 6 5 graph3 2 13 C 11 graphics cable extensions 2 15 graphics card configuration guidelines 2 13 graphics cards and subsystems 98768A 2 13 A1439 2
223. s are configured like a standard disk using SAM or command line interface but because CD ROMs hold read only file systems mw You cannot use a CD ROM for swap space m Users cannot create a new file system on a CD ROM disk Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 3 Considerations for Configuring a Floppy Disk Drive Floppy disk drives are installed as internal devices on some HP UX systems You might need to configure the device drivers into the system for HP UX to be able to communicate with the media See floppy 7 in the HP UX Reference and Floppy Disk Drive Configuration Guidelines later in this chapter for device driver information Floppy disks are not supported as boot disks HP IB floppy disks are no longer supported If using SAM choose the action Add gt Not Using LVM LVM functionality is not supported on floppy disks Unlike HP hard disks which are typically initialized before shipping you must initialize floppy disk media using the mediainit command See mediainit 1M in the HP UX Reference for information Do not use low density floppy disks Supported disk formats vary by system model and are documented on the floppy 7 manpage Floppy drives are supported on HP UX primarily for transferring raw data Thus commands such as tar can be used effectively with floppy disks You must know in what format your media is written In some respects using a floppy disk drive on an HP UX system d
224. s on Hewlett Packard workstations you must configure them using the sbin eisa_config program eisa_config allocates resources such as interrrupt lines memory and DMA channels to all the boards on the E ISA backplane by reading the boards corresponding CFG files Depending on the type of board you run eisa_config in one of two modes m automatic mode which executes automatically each time you reboot the system EISA boards can usually be configured automatically a interactive mode which you can execute from the command line ISA boards require that you run eisa_config in interactive mode This appendix covers m A sample eisa_config session to add an E ISA board m Procedures for moving and removing an E ISA board as well as changing choices for board functions a Troubleshooting E ISA board configuration problems For further discussion of E ISA specifications see eisa_config 1M in the HP UX Reference If you are configuring a custom driver or writing your own device driver refer to HP UX Driver Development Guide part number 98577 90001 and HP UX Driver Development Reference part number 98577 90602 EISA Board Configuration A 1 E ISA Boards and CFG Files ISA boards have physical switches or jumpers for setting the board s characteristics Set the switches and jumpers using documentation provided by the board manufacturer and alter the settings if eisa_config reports conflict EISA boards lack physical
225. scan output from a T500 system configured with eight processors Sample Addresses The console is likely to have an address of 0 44 0 A disk array containing four disks might show several addresses for example 2 52 2 0 2 52 3 0 2 52 4 0 and 2 52 5 0 if attached to a SCSI card at slot 13 in an expansion cabinet bus converter 2 and configured in RAID Independent mode which treats each spindle separately Bus Architectures B 11 Figure B 8 HP 9000 T500 Configuration and Bus Relationships B 12 Bus Architectures H W Type Description lantty ext_bus disk disk disk disk tape disk disk ext_bus be lanmux lan ext_bus disk disk disk disk memory console memory memory memory processor processor processor processor processor processor Be WN AOONOWNRFR OW BR Aa mTN OND N e oOooorrN Y N N e A PWNHROWNR OO H W Path Driver S W State 0 be CLAIMED 0 16 mux2 CLAIMED 0 28 scsi3 CLAIMED 0 28 0 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 28 1 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 36 hpf1i CLAIMED 0 36 0 0 disc4 CLAIMED 0 36 1 0 disc4 CLAIMED 0 36 1 1 disc4 CLAIMED 0 36 1 4 disc4 CLAIMED 0 44 lanmux0 CLAIMED 0 44 0 mux4 CLAIMED 0 44 1 lan3 CLAIMED 0 44 2 lantty0O CLAIMED 0 52 scsil CLAIMED 0 52 0 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 52 1 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 52 2 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 52 3 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 52 4 0 tape2 CLAIMED 0 52 5 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 52 6 0 disc3 CLAIMED 0 53 lpr2 CLAIMED 2 be CLAIMED 2 36 lanmux0 CLAIMED 2 36 1 l
226. se as an HP console by executing the following set of instructions 1 Install the hardware as described in the terminal s manual 2 Configure HP UX to use the Wyse 60 terminfo file to communicate with the terminal To do so set the TERM variable to wy60 by executing the following command for Posix or Korn shell export TERM wy60 Your Wyse 60 terminal is now configured for use as an HP system terminal Please be aware that the configuration is based solely on the Wyse 60 default configuration If further adjustment is required use the terminal values provided in Table 3 5 3 18 Configuring Terminals and Modems Table 3 5 Wyse 60 Default Configuration Values Display Columns 80 Lines 24 Page Length 1 Lines Attributes Char Status Line Standard Scroll Speed Jump Cursor Blink Block Answerback Mode Off Background Dark Screen Saver On Display Cursor On Answerback Conceal Off General Personality Wy60 Comm mode Full Duplex Data Printer Modem Aux Rcvd CR CR Enhance On End of Line Wrap On Auto Scroll On Monitor Off Font Load On Send Ack On Init Tabs Off Width Change Clear Off Keyboard Keyclick On Return CR XMT Limit None Wyse Word Off Keylock Caps Enter CR Fkey Xmit Limit None Language US Key Repeat On Corner Key Funct Break 250 ms Margin Bell Off Comm Baud Rate 9600 Rev Handshake None Aux Baud Rate 9600 Aux Rev Handshake DSR Data Stop Bits 8 1 XMT Handshake Non
227. sequence of connection to or from the specified location For example in Figure 1 3 which displays output from a Model 770 a disk attached to the GSC built in Fast Wide SCSI Interface has the hardware address 8 0 5 0 usr sbin ioscan H 8 0 5 0 H W Path Class Description be 8 be I 0 Adapter 8 0 ext_bus GSC built in Fast Wide SCSI Interface 8 0 5 target 8 0 5 90 disk DEC DSP3210SW Figure 1 3 Terse ioscan H Output from a Model 770 The hardware path can be decoded as follows 8 identifies the bus adapter connecting the GSC bus to the system bus 0 identifies the slot number of the Fast Wide SCSI interface See Figure B 3 in Appendix B Bus Architectures 5 represents the target or SCSI address set on the disk device itself 0 indicates a unit number or SCSI LUN number Field separators slash or dot separate the numbers of the hardware address and have no bearing on system administration The displayed classes are more meaningful in the context of instance numbers which are visible in ioscan f listings and will be discussed shortly Explanation of hardware addresses on multi function cards is in Appendix B 1 10 Getting Started Understanding the Description in ioscan The description field displayed by ioscan derives from the peripheral device itself and is sometimes more cryptic than is ideal Typically a numeric description refers to the manufacturer s vendor ID and in some cases this n
228. sing HP UX commands 3 27 parity 3 12 planning to configure 3 2 ports 3 7 removing using HP UX commands 3 27 removing using SAM 3 27 Index 23 running screen oriented applications on 3 12 setting default modes 3 10 system side configuration 3 6 terminal side configuration 3 10 unique definitions of VT100 keys 3 16 using HP 700 60 in DEC mode 3 17 terminals and modems configuring 3 1 34 device drivers 3 5 terminating processes 3 30 termination HP FL PBus 2 17 SCSI 2 27 SCSI devices 6 8 termio 7 3 5 for modem configuration 3 4 termior 7 3 5 ThinLAN 2 20 third party device drivers C 1 third party peripherals 2 28 tokeni 2 20 2 21 tools Upgrade UPG ANALYSIS fileset 4 15 Upgrade UPG MAN fileset 4 15 trial and error in using tape devices 6 11 troubleshooting eisa_config A 18 TSM access to printers and plotters 7 3 tty class 3 6 tty class and UPS 8 6 ttytype 4 3 11 U unresponsive terminals 3 28 Upgrade UPG ANALYSIS fileset 4 15 Upgrade UPG MAN fileset 4 15 UPS A2941A 8 5 Index 24 A2994A 8 5 A2996A 8 5 A2997A 8 5 A2998A 8 5 AC power failure 8 1 and external bus extenders 8 12 APPCC 1250UX 8 5 APPCC 600UX 8 5 cable pin outs 8 4 cabling guidelines 8 3 configuration requirements 8 5 configuring 8 6 configuring more than one 8 8 DELT 2326 C2 8 5 DELT 2336 C2 8 5 destination of log messages 8 10 error messages 8 12 getty entries 8 7
229. sion standards such as V 22 V 32 V 22bis V 32bis V34 V 42 or V 42bis Save modem settings in non volatile memory on modem so modem remembers setup after power loss Use AT amp W on Hayes modems Record modem settings on a worksheet in Appendix D for future reference 26 Configuring Terminals and Modems Removing or Moving a Terminal or Modem Note Removing the system console is not supported Terminals and modems are most easily removed using SAM because SAM also removes the getty entries in etc inittab and ensures that inittab is reread However it is also a simple matter to remove a terminal or modem using HP UX commands 1 If users will be affected notify them in advance about the change The terminal or modem to be removed cannot be in use it must be inactive Create a backup copy of the etc inittab file by copying it Edit the etc inittab file to remove or modify any getty entries for the terminal Refer to inittab 4 in the HP UX Reference Activate the updated etc inittab file by typing sbin init q Update any software application configurations that use the moved terminal or modem Refer to your software application documentation for specific instructions If you are removing the terminal or modem unplug and disconnect it If you are moving the terminal or modem add the terminal or modem to the system at the new hardware location following the instructions found i
230. sk Drive Selecting Device Drivers for a Disk Device and Interface HP IB Disk Configuration Guidelines HP FL Disk Configuration Guidelines SCSI Disk Configuration Guidelines Floppy Disk Drive Configuration Guidelines Configuring HP UX for a New Disk Device Planning to Configure into your System a Disk Already Containing Data Lone Ensuring Against Clashes with HP UX 10 0 Understanding How to Configure a Disk Already Containing Data Configuring into your System an Unpartitioned Disk Already Containing Data Configuring into Your System a Partitioned Disk Already Containing Data Configuring into your System a an IVM Disk Already Containing Data Moving a Disk Drive to a Different Address Removing a Disk Drive Finding Out the Disk Model Number and Other Information After Configuring HP UX for the Disk Device 3 20 3 22 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 28 3 32 3 34 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 10 4 11 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 19 4 22 4 26 4 34 4 37 4 38 Contents 3 5 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices Planning to Configure a Magneto Optical Device Characteristics of Magneto Optical Devices Understanding Magneto Optical Media Capacity Magneto Optical Disk Configuration Guidelines Configuring HP UX for a Magneto Optical Disk Magneto Optical Disk Library Configuration Guidelines Configuring HP UX for a Magneto Optical Disk Library After Configuring a Magneto Optica
231. stration HP recommends that you create the line printer device file dev c p _lp using usr sbin mksf as explained in Creating a Device Special File for a Printer or Plotter Configured to a Serial Port The device naming convention derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the tty class of interface card to which the device is attached and p is the port to which the printer is attached 3 The following printer models can be configured to the Series 800 serial interfaces 2225D 2227A 2228A 2235A B C D 2276A 2277A 2562A C 7 2563A B C 2564B C 2565A 2566A 2566B C 2567B 2567C 2684A 2686A D 2932A 2934A 33440A 33447A 33449A 33459A 33471A 3630A 41063A C1200A C1602A C2001A C2106A C2354A Obsolete models are shown in parenthesis and are listed for reference only 4 Specifying muxO causes cio_ca0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 5 Specifying mux2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 6 These cards are typically used for console and remote console If the second port is not being used for remote console a printer may be attached 7 Specifying mux4 causes lanmux0 lantty0 lan3 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 9 Table 7 4 Serial Plotter Configuration Requirements 28639 60001 Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Series 700 int
232. t A 2 changing choices for E ISA board functions A 10 ChannelSpan card A1749A 2 16 character I O C 2 character major number C 3 CharDrv 7 11 7 12 ChrDrv 2 11 CIO HP IB printers 7 6 SCSI tape drives 6 5 Series 800 HP FL disk drives 4 7 Series 800 HP IB disk drives 4 5 Series 800 HP IB tape drivers 6 2 Series 800 magneto optical disk drives 5 4 Series 800 RS 232 C plotters 7 10 Series 800 RS 232 C printers 7 9 Series 800 SCSI disk drives 4 9 Series 800 SCSI printers 7 13 Series 800 SCSI tape drivers 6 5 cio_ca0 2 5 2 16 2 18 2 20 2 23 3 5 45 4 7 4 9 5 4 5 6 6 2 6 4 7 6 7 7 7 9 7 10 7 13 CIPER printer protocol 7 6 class and instance number 1 12 of interface 1 6 1 12 C 5 command cat 3 30 comment eisa_config A 8 init 3 28 init A 8 lifep 1M 4 28 mkboot 1M 4 28 move A 14 remove eisa_config A 15 save eisa_config A 13 set shell command 3 33 stty 3 33 Index 3 who 3 28 commands mknod 1M 7 21 comment command eisa_config A 8 compatibility pseudo driver cpd 4 14 compression data 6 1 6 5 6 11 config 1M C 15 configuration initializing A 8 configuration guidelines black boxes C 1 graphics devices 2 14 HP IB 2 18 instruments C 1 SCSI 2 22 third party device drivers C 1 configuration strategy tape drives 6 1 configuring strategy overview 1 1 console compared to terminal configuration 3 12 configuring a non HP terminal 3 13 connectivity for
233. t 60 ttyOp3 9600 ttp3 is a label used by init to identify the action uniquely see init 1M The 2 is the run state Systems are shipped with the multi user run state see the initdefault entry in inittab When the system is running in single user mode state s this process is not executed The respawn tells init to restart the process if it exits The usr sbin getty is the process used to set up serial terminal and modem ports and provide the initial login prompt 3 10 Configuring Terminals and Modems m The h option ensures that the getty will not hang up the line before setting the port speed The t 60 is a security option to require that the user login name and password is typed within 60 seconds tty0p3 identifies the port in dev to which the getty attaches 3 The 9600 highlighted does not represent the baud rate It is a pointer into the etc gettydefs file telling the system side what entry to use An H entry is also provided for hard wired terminals See gettydefs 4 Invoke the following command to activate the updated etc inittab file sbin init q Add an optional entry to etc ttytype Entries should conform to the format documented on the ttytype 4 manpage In the following example 2392 is the terminal type console and tty0p3 are the device file names in the dev directory 2392 console 2392 tty0p3 Now that HP UX is set to communicate with the new terminal verify that the commu
234. t modem control enable 10 Dial in modem lanO 16 23 Reserved 24 Diagnostic access lan1 25 30 Reserved lan2 31 Protocol lan3 1 IEEE 2 Ethernet osi0 16 31 Reserved CentIf 16 27 Reserved Handshake mode 1 Automatic using ACK BUSY 2 Automatic using BUSY only 3 Bidirectional read write for ScanJet 4 Stream mode 5 Pulsed mode using ACK BUSY 6 Pulsed mode using BUSY only lpro HP IB device or HP IB unit or 24 Diagnostic access 28 Raw mode lpri SCSI target SCSI LUN 25 Reserved 29 No wait lpr2 26 Auto form feed 30 Old paper out lpr3 27 Case fold behavior 31 Eject page during paper out recovery hpib HP IB device Unused Unused Unused Major and Minor Numbers C 9 Table C 5 Bit Assignments for Miscellaneous Devices bits 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 sctl SCSI target SCSI LUN Reserved O0 Select with ATN enabled default 1 Select with ATN controlled by scsi_cnd_parms 2 Inhibit inquiry at open gt 2 Not supported instr0 16 20 Instrument address 24 Diagnostic access 21 23 Reserved 25 31 Reserved ptyO Bits 8 31 Unique hex value for pty ptyl pdnO Bits 16 23 2 type 24 Diagnostic bit 25 31 unused psio 16 23 Reserved 24 diagnostic psit 25 31 psi0 Reserved 25 31 psi1 PDA Index graph3 16 23 Bus specifier Unused 0 Image planes 1 Overlay planes ps2 b hexadecimal Reserved Port number 28 Autosearc
235. t the drivers are present m adds them if necessary and m reconfigures the kernel For some devices SAM also automates other necessary steps For example when adding a terminal to your system SAM edits the etc inittab file to add the terminal entry You have to perform this step manually if you are not using SAM to configure the terminal Getting Started 1 3 Using HP UX Commands to Configure Peripherals You must use HP UX commands to configure peripherals to the system if the device cannot be automatically configured or if SAM is not on your system Virtually all Hewlett Packard disk drives tape drives printers plotters and terminals are configurable automatically Each peripheral specific chapter of this book gives procedures for using HP UX commands for configuration Exceptions Drivers insf Cannot Recognize Third party drivers and certain drivers used for instrumentation or black box applications are not recognized by insf to create device files automatically during the reboot process If you are adding a peripheral device requiring a driver that cannot be configured automatically you must configure the device driver and create the device files using the ioscan and mksf or mknod commands For guidance in these cases consult Appendix C Major and Minor Numbers at the end of this book Chapter 7 Configuring Printers and Plotters also has information on configuring instruments that require manual manipulation
236. tape2 CLAIMED DEVICE WANGTEK 51000 SCSI dev diag rmt cOt0dO dev rmt cOtOdOBESTn dev rmt cOtOdOBEST dev rmt cOtOdOBESTnb dev rmt cOtOdOBESTb Consult the ioscan 1M manpage for further information about this tool 1 14 Getting Started Configuring HP UX for any Peripheral A Summary Prepare by gathering information required for the successful configuration of the peripheral Considerations vary and are discussed in each peripheral specific chapter For example m Have you prepared the physical location for the peripheral device a To what interface are you connecting the peripheral m What device drivers are required by the peripheral device In virtually all cases the System Administration Manager SAM provides the simplest interface for configuring HP UX for any standard peripheral device If you must use the command line interface instead of SAM the following procedure will familiarize you with the task 1 Determine the device drivers needed for your peripheral device and interface by consulting the tables in the chapter devoted to that class of peripheral device If any necessary device driver is absent from the kernel you will need to rebuild the kernel to include it Here is how to rebuild the kernel a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep system_prep writes a system file based on your current kernel in the current directory
237. tdown 1M in the HP UX Reference 3 Bring the system to a halt using the shutdown command 4 Turn off the power to all peripheral devices and then to the SPU On systems with powerfail mode turn off the battery back up also Unplug the power cords 5 Select an appropriate slot in the I O card cage and install the interface card following instructions provided with the card and computer hardware manual If you are also configuring a peripheral device to the card install it at this time also Use the cabling recommended in the hardware documentation 6 Record all pertinent information about the installation and configuration on a worksheet at the back of this book Keep accurate records of the interface as shown on the ID stickers slot number power requirements and bus address 7 Turn on the power to all peripheral devices Wait for them to become ready then turn on power to the card cages and SPU 2 30 Configuring Interface Cards On booting up HP UX detects the new interface and peripheral device and associates them with their device drivers insf creates the device special files required to communicate with the devices Verify the configuration by invoking the ioscan command to confirm that the interface card and any peripheral devices you configured are present and device special files have been created In the following sample ioscan output the LAN card installed in slot 14 of a Model 887 is displayed as
238. tem file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 4 Notify users that the system will be shut down to configure the optical disk library You can use the wall command and or the interactive capabilities of the shutdown command to broadcast a message to users before the system goes down See wall 1M or shutdown 1M in the HP UX Reference 5 Bring the system down to a halt using the shutdown command 5 8 Configuring Magneto Optical Devices 6 Turn off the power to all peripheral devices and then to the SPU 7 Attach the optical disk library to the host computer system following the instructions and using the cabling recommended in the hardware documentation Make sure the last device in the SCSI chain is terminated 8 Turn on the power to all peripheral devices including the optical disk library Wait for the peripheral devices to become ready then turn on power to the SPU On booting up HP UX detects the optical disk library and associates it with its device drivers insf creates the character and block device special dev files required to communicate with each disk surface in the optical disk library By default insf creates device special files for 32 optical disks 64 device special files for the surfaces plus a device special file for the autochanger If you are configuring a larger capacity m
239. tem without changing the kernel still swapping to the original swap device Add the EISA card and connect the new device Boot the system which is still swapping to the original swap device Configure the kernel to swap to the new EISA device Reboot the system If the new swap device is connected to an EISA card it will be configured automatically by sbin eisa_config If the new card creates a resource conflict with EISA cards already configured you must run eisa_config manually to resolve the conflict If the new swap device is connected to an ISA card you must run eisa_config manually to configure the new swap device Dok W DY 2 12 Configuring Interface Cards Graphics Card Configuration Guidelines The following table shows the driver and device special files used by graphics cards and subsystems Table 2 7 Graphics Card Configuration Requirements Architecture Required Drivers Default Device Special Files Series 700 all models graph3 dev crt Series 800 Models 829 dev crto dev crti dev crt2 dev crt3 dev ocrt dev ocrt0 dev ocrti dev ocrt2 dev ocrt3 1 Specifying graph3 causes wsio ite and framebuf to be included in the kernel During system bootup ioinit creates the default device special files shown in this table when it encounters the framebuf driver If for any reason these device files are insufficient for your purposes you can create new ones using mknod As s
240. ter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I O Adapter 1 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in SCSI 1 3 target CLAIMED DEVICE 1 3 0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A dev rmt cOt3d0BEST dev rmt cOt3d0N0MODn dev rmt cOt3d0BESTb dev rmt cOt3d0N0MODnb dev rmt cOt3d0BESTn dev rmt cOt3d0N0MOD dev rmt cOt3dO0BESTnb dev rmt cOt3d0N0MODb 1 4 target CLAIMED DEVICE 1 4 0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE HP 97560 dev dsk cOt4d0 dev rdsk cOt4d0 1 5 target CLAIMED DEVICE 1 5 0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N dev dsk cOt5dO dev rdsk cOt5d0 1 6 target CLAIMED DEVICE 1 6 0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N dev dsk cOt6d0 dev rdsk cOt6d0 2 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in LAN dev etherO dev lanoO 3 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in HIL dev hil1 dev hil7 dev hil_0 6 dev hil2 dev hil_0 1 dev hil_0 7 dev hil3 dev hil_0 2 dev hilkbd 4 asioO CLAIMED INTERFACE Built in RS 232C dev diag mux0 dev mux0 dev ttyOpo 6 Cent If CLAIMED INTERFACE Centronics Interface 8 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE dev audioBA dev audioEL_O dev audioLL dev audioBA_O dev audioEU dev audioLL_0O eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Adapter processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory memory 63 Figure B 3 ioscan output for a Model 725 Bus Architectures B 5 Model 770 J Series The Model 770 features increased expandability on dual GSC buses ioscan output for this system is found in several examples in Chapter 1 Getting Started Fig
241. the address of the tape device on the HP IB bus d is the device number typically d0 BEST represents the operational capabilities likely to be required including the highest density format and data compression if the device supports it b n nb designates style of tape positioning b is Berkeley style tape positioning that is after file close the tape is not repositioned in any way If b is not designated AT amp T style tape closing occurs that is the tape might be positioned after the next end of file EOF point n designates no rewind 4 Naming convention for systems installed with short file names For c t d see footnote 3 f represents the highest density format and data compression if the device supports it Or i represents a pointer into a tape device property table For b n nb see footnote 3 5 Syntax available for backward compatibility designates tape drive at card instance The m mb mn and mnb device special files are linked to c t d BEST c t d BESTb c t d BESTn and c t d BESTnb respectively or their equivalent short file names 6 Specifying hpib1 causes sio pfail and pa to be included automatically in the kernel Configuring Tape Drives 6 3 Older style command set 80 CS 80 HP IB cartridge tape drives are supported for HP UX on both the Series 700 and 800 HP IB interface using disk device drivers They are shown in Table 6 2 Note these devices have a much more limited range of capabilities
242. the order that HP UX encounters the specific class of the interface card when binding it into the system This number is displayed in decimal notation in the I column of ioscan output Bits 16 through 31 encode driver dependent characteristics which are documented in Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 and Table C 5 You can use these tables to construct custom minor numbers when you require a driver to recognize or use specific or non standard features of a device Table C 1 may be useful for translating bit assignments into hexadecimal digits Table C 1 Decimal Binary and Hexadecimal Equivalents Decimal Binary Hex Decimal Binary Hex 0 0000 0 8 1000 8 1 0001 1 9 1001 9 2 0010 2 10 1010 A 3 0011 3 11 1011 B 4 0100 4 12 1100 C 5 0101 5 13 1101 D 6 0110 6 14 1110 E 7 0111 7 15 1111 F Major and Minor Numbers C 5 Examples of Minor Number Creation A Minor Number for a MUX Driver The minor number 0x010200 shown earlier for the mux2 driver can be represented as follows bits 8 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 binary 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0000 hex 0x 0 1 0 2 0 0 0000 0001 The eight bits of the card instance number is 1 tty1 in the device special file name 0000 0010 The port address is 2 p2 in the device special file name 0000 0000 The remaining bits are set to zero A Minor Number for a SCSI Disk Device T
243. the printer plotter manual o baud rate o parity o data length o handshake o symbol or character set a Additional steps may be required when configuring a printer or plotter to communicate through an HP Datacommunications and Terminal Controller DTC or telnet port access Such asynchronous communication is useful when connecting a printer to an X terminal for example Refer to the chapter Setting up Printers Using the HP UX Spooler in the DTC Device File Access Utilities and Telnet Port Identification manual m Once you have configured a printer or plotter to a serial port follow the procedure Creating a Device Special File for a Printer or Plotter Configured to a Serial Port 7 8 Configuring Printers and Plotters Table 7 3 Serial Printer Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Drivers Device File Series 700 internal asio0 dev tty tpt Series 800 CIO 98196A mux0 same as above 98190A Series 800 HP PB 40299B3 mux2 same as above J2092A J2093A J2094A J2096A A1703 60022 Series 800 HP PB A1703 60003 mux4 same as above 28639 60001 1 The following model printers can be configured to the Series 700 serial interface 2562C 2563C 2566B C 2567C 33449A 33459A C1645A C1676A C2001A C2010A C2106A C2113A C2354A C2356A 2 By default insf creates the standard tty device file shown For ease in system admini
244. this technique However you can configure wsio style interface drivers as long as the driver is included in the system file and no other interface driver in the stand system file can claim the card in question For further information refer to the Driver Development Guide 1 Rebuild the kernel to include the added device driver by following these steps a Change directory to the build environment stand build There execute a system preparation script system_prep system_prep writes a system file based on your current kernel in the current directory That is it creates stand build system The v provides verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system Major and Minor Numbers C 11 b Edit the stand build system file in two places to add the custom driver i List the driver in the upper portion of the system file with other similar drivers For example the following figure shows the upper portion of a system file with a custom SCSI driver disco added FOO op oO GG i aia iia a GGG IG IG kak kak ak ak ak ak atk ack a ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak Bus Dependent subsystems FOO op oO GG i aia iia a GGG IG IG kak kak ak ak ak ak atk ack a ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ccio Cache Coherent I O ccio FOO op oO GG i aia iia a GGG IG IG kak kak ak ak ak ak atk ack a ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak ak SCSI drivers FOO op oO GG i aia iia a
245. tic Extender overcomes SCSI distance limitation to a maximum of 100 meters Note however this device is single ended SCSI and is recommended for printers optical libraries and magnetic tape drives only It is not supported for SwitchOver configurations SCSI cable impedance and construction have a significant impact on signal quality use only HP cables Configuring Interface Cards 2 25 Calculating SCSI Cable Length Table 2 16 demonstrates how to calculate SCSI bus cable lengths for a typical installation Table 2 16 Example of SCSI Cable Length Calculation Starting Point Device Cable to Next Device Internal Cumulative Cable Cable Length SCSI host adapter 5062 3383 1 0m 0 1m 1 1m HP device 1 92222A 0 5m 0 2m 1 8m HP device 2 92222A 0 5m 0 4m 2 7m HP device 3 92222A 0 5m 0 3m 3 5m HP device 4 none 0 4m 3 9m Total 3 9m All devices must be connected to a common single point system reference ground The system ground must be isolated from other electrical devices such as copying machines arc welders and air conditioners Cables supplied by HP have correct grounding 2 26 Configuring Interface Cards SCSI Signal Termination Make sure there are no unterminated cables that is that all cables are attached to a device at both ends Because a closed loop is required by the SCSI bus for successful signal transmission the last SCSI device in the chain must have
246. tipluxer card 8 6 ioscan output for HP IB instrument 7 26 ioscan output for HP IB plotter 7 24 ioscan output for magneto optical disk library 5 9 ioscan output for mux interface 7 18 ioscan output for serial printer 7 19 ioscan output of a LAN card 2 31 ioscan output of a Model 8x9 K Series B 14 ioscan output of a multi function card B 9 ioscan output of a T500 system B 14 ioscan output of tape driver 6 9 lssf output for serial printer 7 20 lssf output for serial printer with hardware flow control RTS CTS enabled 7 20 lvlnboot output 4 26 minor number for printer 7 19 mksf command for reading non default tape format 6 10 mksf command for tape driver exhaustive mode 6 11 mksf command to prevent tape data compression 6 11 6 12 moving a disk 4 26 moving a printer or plotter 7 28 output from 1lssf for modem files 3 23 output of ps ef 3 31 portion of stand system file C 12 sample CFG file used by eisa_config A 2 sample display of EISA CFG files A 7 sample display of eisa_config switch jumper settings A 12 sample eisa_config exit showing subsequent steps A 11 sample eisa_config start up screen A 6 setting hardware flow control RTS CTS for serial printer 7 19 tar test to verify tape driver configuration 6 9 using eisa_config show slot command A 8 using ioscan C class option 1 14 usr conf master d sample file entry C 13 exhaustive mode for tape device special file
247. tire disk s0 when s is unspecified See the disk 7 manpage 4 The following disk drives can be configured to a Series 800 HP PB HP FL interface 7936FL 7937FL C2201A C2204A C2252B BZ HA HZ C2254B BZ HA HZ C2257A C2258B HA C2259B HA Models shown in parenthesis are obsolete and are listed for reference only 5 Specifying disc4 causes disc3 hpfl1 target sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 7 SCSI Disk Configuration Guidelines The SCSI address of a device dictates the device s priority when arbitrating for the SCSI bus Use SCSI address 7 for the highest priority device usually the host followed by subsequent addresses in descending order 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Each fast wide differential SCSI II card can support up to 15 peripherals including up to 7 disk arrays Due to limitations in SCSLII disk arrays can be connected to addresses 0 through 7 only do not connect disk arrays to addresses 8 through 15 HP UX recommends UPS for powerfail protection of fast wide differential disk arrays Do not exceed 6 meters maximum cabling for single ended SCSI and 25 meters maximum for fast wide differential SCSI configurations Make sure that every SCSI bus is properly terminated Table 4 3 lists the HP disk and CD ROM devices configurable through the SCSI interface on Series 700 and 800 systems Note the c t d Ls s
248. u will be shutting down the system to configure the E ISA board Then shut down the system and turn the power off 3 Set the switches and jumpers to their required settings as determined by eisa_config If you are installing a new board add it at this time If you are installing a peripheral device with this board connect the device 4 Turn on all peripheral devices then the SPU and reboot the system When the system boots the E ISA board settings are written to non volatile A memory NVM making the boards fully accessible by HP UX EISA Board Configuration A 13 Moving an E ISA Board To move a currently configured E ISA board 1 Invoke sbin eisa_config and at the EISA prompt issue the move command specifying the board s current and new slot numbers EISA move current_slot new_slot 2 After moving all desired boards within eisa_config exit the program eisa_config will display any switch and jumper settings that may have changed during the session Refer to the etc eisa config 1log file for a record of the new configuration including the required settings 3 Remove the old device file for the board with the rmsf command 4 Warn all users that the system will be brought down Halt the system with the shutdown command and turn off the power 5 Set any physical switches and jumpers according to eisa_config requirements Refer to Setting Switches and Jumpers on an E ISA Interface Board 6
249. uded to be configured automatically in the kernel 6 Specifying hpib1 causes sio pfail and pa to be included automatically in the kernel 6 4 Configuring Tape Drives SCSI Tape Drive Configuration Guidelines Each single ended SCSI interface card has a maximum of eight SCSI addresses ranging in order of decreasing priority from 7 to 0 with SCSI address 7 reserved for the host adapter card Use 0 the lowest priority address available for low performance tape drive configuration High performance tape drives will need a higher priority When using an STK 3480 tape drive connect the device to its own external SCSI host adapter in the SPU to prevent the possibility of data corruption if the bus glitches when the tape drive is powered down Follow manufacturer s recommendations in hardware manuals 3480 devices are supported as reference devices on HP UX that is they are supported to a limited degree A third party application is needed to read write IBM compatible tapes on HP UX systems See mt 7 in the HP UX Reference for additional limitations Where possible connect the 7980S SX and C2463F R tape devices to their own external SCSI bus to prevent possible data corruption from controller glitches Note By default insf creates device special files that write tapes with data compression enabled if the tape drive doing the writing supports data compression If you have to write a tape on a tape drive that supports data
250. uidelines 2 12 configuring A 5 moving A 14 removing A 15 setting switches and jumpers A 13 switches and jumpers A 2 isdn 2 20 isdnnetd 2 20 isdnsn 2 20 isdnx25 2 20 Index K kernel stand vmunix 1 16 2 30 3 8 4 12 4 18 4 20 4 23 4 30 5 8 6 8 7 16 7 25 C 15 associating drivers C 2 configuration file stand system C 15 rebuilding to add drivers 1 15 6 7 7 16 7 24 kernel stand vmunix rebuilding to add drivers 3 6 kernel structures and ioscan 1M 1 9 keyboard bits C 11 kill 1 3 31 killing processes 3 30 L lan0 2 20 land C 8 lani C8 lan2 2 20 lan2 C 8 lan3 2 20 2 21 7 9 7 10 LAN 9000 interface cards 2 20 lanadmin 1M 2 2 LAN based multi function cards B 7 lanmux0 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 8 5 lantty0 2 5 3 5 7 9 7 10 8 5 library driver location of C 13 lifep 1M 4 28 limitations to non HP terminal emulation 3 20 limited support STK 3480 tape drive 6 5 6 11 location of device drivers C 2 location of libraries C 13 Logical Volume Manager LVM 4 3 need to import LVM information 4 14 to apportion disk space 4 14 Index 13 1pro 2 11 7 6 lpro C 8 lpri 7 6 lpri C 8 lpr2 7 11 7 12 lpr2 C 8 lpr3 7 13 lpr3 C 8 lpsched 1M 7 23 Isdev 1M C 3 lssf 1M 3 6 7 19 LU number compared to instance number 1 13 LU number replaced 1 13 lulnboot 1M 4 26 4 32 LVM commands ludisplay 1M 4 27 luinboot 1M 4 26 4 3
251. umber corresponds to more than one model number If you are troubleshooting a peripherals problem the description is often useful information to an HP support engineer Full Listing of ioscan ioscan f displays full information about the system configuration including instance number device interface driver software state and hardware type The fn option displays the device special files also usr sbin ioscan f Class I H W Path Driver S W State H W Type Description ext_bus o 8 0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE F W SCSI target o 8 0 5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8 0 5 0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE HP C2247 ba o 8 12 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I O Adapter ext_bus 2 8 12 0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Parallel Interface audio Oo 8 12 1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Audio tty O 8 12 4 asioO CLAIMED INTERFACE RS 232C ext_bus 1 8 12 5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE SCSI target 1 8 12 5 0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8 12 5 0 0 sflop CLAIMED DEVICE TEAC FC 1 lan O 8 12 6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE LAN be 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I O Adapter graphics O 10 0 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics Figure 1 4 Excerpted ioscan f Output from a Model 770 Getting Started 1 11 Understanding Class and Instance The following ioscan output shows just the ext_bus class of a sample Model 770 system The card instance numbers are listed under I and are highlighted For device file naming and hardware mapping the only significant instance numbers are those associ
252. unmounting file systems For detailed information on Network File Systems refer to Installing and Administering NFS Services 5 If you are moving an LVM disk which is not being used for the root file system a Execute a vgdisplay v command to display the contents of the active volume groups When moving an LVM disk most of your LVM commands will be based on the volume group to which the disk belongs b Execute lvdisplay v for every logical volume in the volume group of the disk being removed to locate any logical volumes currently straddling the disk being moved and another disk If you find any m Back up the data and remove the logical volume by executing an lvremove command Or if the logical volume is mirrored m Remove the mirroring by executing an lvreduce m 0 command c Execute a vgchange command to deactivate the volume group to which the disk is being added d If the disk comprises an entire volume group execute a vgexport command to remove it from the current configuration If the disk comprises a portion of a volume group execute a vgreduce command The disk is now free to be used as desired Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 27 6 Determine the hardware address for the new location Look at the Hardware Path field of ioscan output to make sure you choose an unused hardware address 7 If you are moving a disk drive containing the root file system and you want to cont
253. ure B 4 Model 770 J Series Bus Relationships B 6 Bus Architectures Series 800 Bus Architecture Model E Systems Model E computers report 806 when queried with uname a Slots 9 through 12 addresses 56 36 2 to 56 48 2 support HP PB cards as shown in Figure B 5 Figure B 5 HP 9000 Model E Bus Relationships Addressing on Multi Function Cards Model E Example Slots 13 and 14 addresses 56 52 2 to 56 56 of Model E systems are reserved for one of two multi function personality cards Bus Architectures B 7 a MUX based multi function I O card containing single ended SCSI parallel port and 8 or 16 RS 232 C ports for console access port for remote console and other serial devices a LAN based multi function I O card containing 802 3 LAN serial connection for PowerTrust UPS and remote modem access port with security option to defeat inadvertent system resets control B MUX defeat switch Table B 1 shows the hardware addresses for a sample Model E multi function card Figure B 6 shows how multiple functions on Model E map to the bus architecture Note this figure shows a detail of Figure B 5 Table B 1 Hardware Addresses of Multi Function I O Cards Slot Hardware Path Peripheral Device Number 13 56 52 SCSI_ID SCSI device 13 56 53 0 device_address Parallel printer 14 56 56 0 Console 14 56 56 port 7 Remote console 14 56 56 port 1 UPS PowerTrust 14 60 6 LAN B 8 Bus Architectures
254. veral additional software elements need to be present for proper configuration m A CFG file must reside in the sbin lib eisa directory for every EISA board m The eisa interface driver must be part of the kernel before you can run eisa_config for all HP and other E ISA boards If you are configuring a board by a different manufacturer the manufacturer must provide a device driver for the board information for a CFG file and any additional information required to create valid device files In addition to the eisa driver the interface driver used by the specific card such as SCSI HP IB or LAN must also be part of the kernel If you are connecting a peripheral device such as a printer or tape drive to the card the peripheral s device driver must be part of the kernel The interface and device drivers can be added at the same time thus enabling you to regenerate the kernel and reboot your system only once In the simplest case when you reboot eisa_config runs and automatically configures your E ISA cards based on the switch settings or information it finds in the CFG files In more complex cases eisa_config runs and discovers configuration conflicts requiring you to set switches and jumpers on the board or to run the command in interactive mode to resolve the conflicts See sections further in this chapter and eisa_config 1M in the HP UX Reference and the on line help within the eisa_config program A 4 EISA Board C
255. verall system performance depends partly on how your disks are arranged on your system To optimize performance consider the distribution of data on your disks If possible use several smaller disks instead of a single larger capacity disk for all disk needs Configure a mid sized disk for example 677MB or 1GB for and usr file systems and for any software applications Use separate disks for user files database files and anything else that grows This allows the system to perform more efficiently by distributing I O across spindles and shortens the time for file system integrity check Do not exceed HP recommended guidelines for maximum number of disks or disk arrays per interface card Note too that the kind of disk access random vs sequential CPU overhead and total system capacity cabling distance disk array configuration and block size all affect performance When configuring a disk drive to an HP IB interface do not put it on the same interface card as a device such as a tape drive requiring slower access to the bus You cannot mix HP IB disks and disks of other interfaces in the same LVM volume group Consult your HP sales representative for information on performance expectations based on your predominant system I O workload and disk characteristics 4 2 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Considerations for Configuring a Disk Array You must use SAM to configure and manage the HP A3231A and A3
256. vers to communicate with the printer or plotter m setting up the HP UX LP spooler to send print jobs to the printer or plotter and to recognize the printer or plotter s features Printers and plotters are most easily configured for local remote or network access using SAM usr sbin sam SAM creates the appropriate device files when adding a local printer and helps identify missing drivers if it cannot find a particular interface If you configure a printer or plotter using the HP UX command line approach you can use this chapter for the kernel configuration and then refer to the HP UX System Administration Tasks manual for instructions on setting up the LP spooler If you are using something other than the default HP UX spooler consult the documentation accompanying that application for instructions on setting it up Familiarize yourself with the various pieces of documentation before proceeding with the installation and configuration Configuring Printers and Plotters 7 1 Preparing to Configure HP UX for a Printer or Plotter Choosing Means of Access Printers and plotters can be connected to the system to be accessed locally remotely or through the network In Figure 7 1 the printer basil is physically connected to a system named primrose printer lt basil Figure 7 1 Local and Remote Access to a Printer The physical connection might be serial RS 232 C parallel SCSI or HP IB depending on the s
257. view of peripheral configuration explanation of I O convergence syntax of device special file names information on associating device special files with their peripheral devices by using lssf and ioscan Keep this manual and the following others available for reference when installing and configuring peripheral devices a The installation manuals shipped with the device m HP UX System Administration Tasks m HP UX Reference Commands such as mksf insf and ioscan now available on both Series 700 and 800 systems now make it largely unnecessary to manipulate the minor number literally However if you are configuring a peripheral for unusual circumstances you might wish to consult the appendices at the back of this book Note Configuring a peripheral device requires that you operate with root privileges In consideration for others on the system exercise caution when acting as superuser Getting Started 1 1 Peripheral Configuration in its Simplest Terms Any peripheral device requires three steps to communicate with an HP UX system configure install reboot 1 Configure the device drivers into the kernel Device drivers are like translators that speak both the language of the peripheral device and the language of the computer Install the hardware Perform any hardware specific installation procedures required to physically connect the peripheral device to your computer Then turn on the power to the pe
258. w peripheral device in the appropriate dev directories 4 Verify the configuration by invoking the ioscan command as discussed earlier in this chapter 1 16 Getting Started Configuring Interface Cards Configuring an interface card or device adapter may provide new connectivity to external devices or instruments For this to occur the interface driver for the card must be present in the kernel When the system is booted HP UX associates the driver software module with the card hardware path to provide communication for the external device or instrument Figure 2 1 Role of Drivers in Configuring Interface Cards and Peripheral Devices This chapter gives guidelines and configuration procedures for each type of HP interface card If you are configuring an EISA or ISA card also consult Appendix A EISA Board Configuration If you are configuring a custom SIO style driver consult Appendix C Major and Minor Numbers Configuring Interface Cards 2 1 Planning to Configure an Interface Card m Read the instructions to be sure you understand them before proceeding Have available the documentation supplied with the interface card m Observe anti static precautions when handling interface cards Interface cards and device adapters are susceptible to damage by electrostatic discharge which can result in degraded performance or loss of operation o Keep the card in or on its anti static packaging until you install it or us
259. w r 1 bin bin 175 0x0b2000 Mar 25 15 46 dev rdsk c11t2d0 usr sbin lssf dev rdsk c11t2d0 disc2 card instance 11 HPFL address 2 unit O section 0 at address 6 8 4 2 dev rdsk c11t2d0 1l dev ret cOt3d1 crw r 1 bin bin 214 0x003140 Mar 25 12 41 dev rct cOt3d1 usr sbin lssf dev rcet cOt3d1 disci card instance O HPIB address 3 unit 1 cartridge tape section O at address 2 4 0 3 dev rct cOt3d1 11 dev rmt cOt1d0N0MOD crw rw rw 1 bin bin 205 0x00100f May 4 11 31 dev rmt cOt1dONOMOD usr sbin lssf dev rmt cOt1d0N0MOD stape card instance 0 SCSI target 1 SCSI LUN O at amp t keep existing density format at address 2 0 1 1 0 dev rmt cOt1dO0NOMOD 11 dev rmt cOt1dOBESTb crw rw rw 2 bin bin 205 0x001080 Apr 28 17 24 dev rmt cOt1dOBESTb usr sbin lssf dev rmt cOt1d0BESTb stape card instance O SCSI target 1 SCSI LUN O berkeley best density available at address 2 0 1 1 0 dev rmt cOt1d0BESTb 11 dev rac c1t1d0_2a crw r r 1 root users 230 0x011003 May 3 16 46 dev rac c1t1d0_2a usr sbin lssf dev rac c1t1d0_2a autoxO card instance 1 SCSI target 1 SCSI LUN O optical disk 2 side a at address 52 1 0 dev rac c1t1d0_2a 1 8 Getting Started Viewing the System Configuration with ioscan The usr sbin ioscan command is the single most versatile tool in HP UX for displaying your system configuration For example you can use ioscan to identify available hardware addresses Terse Listing
260. which extracts the system file from the current kernel and writes a system file in your current directory That is it creates stand build system The v gives verbose explanation as the script executes cd stand build usr lbin sysadm system_prep v s system Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives 4 17 b Edit the stand build system file to add the absent driver s c Build the kernel by invoking the mk_kernel command This creates stand build vmunix_test a kernel ready for testing usr sbin mk_kernel s system d Save the old system file and kernel by moving them Thus if anything goes wrong you still have a bootable kernel mv stand system stand system prev mv stand vmunix stand vmunix prev e Move the new system file and new kernel into place ready to be used when you reboot the system mv stand build system stand system mv stand build vmunix_test stand vmunix 3 Bring the system down and physically install the disk device 4 Turn on the power to all peripheral devices Wait for them to become ready then turn on power to the SPU On booting up HP UX detects the new disk and associates it with its device driver insf creates the character and block device special dev files required to communicate with the disk 5 Execute usr sbin ioscan fun C disk again to identify the newly configured disk device and its device special files 4
261. wo ports can be used for console and remote console only card also includes access port AP 3 Specifying mux4 causes lanmux0 lantty0 sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 4 Card also includes console and access port AP 5 Specifying mux2 causes sio pfail and pa to be included in the kernel 6 Peripheral devices must be local up to 15m distance does not support modem signals 7 up to 1200m 8 Peripherals may be connected locally up to 15m using data and modem signals or remotely using asynchronous modems 9 Personality card also includes AP SCSI LAN The two ports of this card can be used for console and remote console only 10 Personality card also includes AP SCSI parallel 2 6 Configuring Interface Cards Distribution Panels for Asynchronous Connectivity Distribution panels DDPs ADP MDPs can be used to expand the connectivity between serial interface card and peripheral device Data communications and terminal controllers DTCs provide additional serial connectivity for local or remote devices directly to the LAN These mechanisms are illustrated in Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 Serial Connectivity via Distribution Panels or DTC Table 2 3 summarizes the distribution panels and their capabilities All distribution panels listed provide connectivity for terminals printers and plotters Those with full duplex modem control provide connectivity for modems also Configuring Interface Cards 2 7
262. yntax used in default device special files derives from ioscan output c is the card instance for the ext_bus class of interface card to which the device is attached t is the target SCSI address of the disk device on the interface d is the device unit number s specifies section number and is provided for backward compatibility the device file addresses the entire disk s0 when s is unspecified See the disk 7 manpage 4 8 Configuring Disk Drives Disk Arrays and CD ROM Drives Table 4 3 SCSI II Disk Configuration Requirements Architecture Interface Card Interface and Default Device Files SCSI II Type Device Drivers Series 700 Core I O internal sdisk dev rl dsk c t d s Single Ended Series 700 EISA 25525B eisa same as above Fast Narrow Differential sdisk Series 700 Models 735 755 internal sdisk same as above Fast Wide Differential 4 Series 800 CIO 27147A scsi2 same as above Single Ended disc3 Series 800 HP PB 28655A scsil same as above Single Ended disc3 Series 800 HP PB 28696A scsi3 same as above Fast Wide Differential disc3 1 The following disk devices can be configured to a Series 700 Single Ended SCSI I interface A1999A A2655A A2657A C2214B C2216T C2217T C2291A C2293A T U C2295B C2473T C2963A C2964A C3020T C3021T C3023T C3024T C3027U C3028U A3182A 2 Specifying sdisk causes sct1 c700 and c720 to
263. ystem interface and printer Basil is connected as a local printer to primrose The LP spooler on primrose is configured to include the local printer basil Print requests generated on primrose are spooled directly to basil Users on a system called hyacinth can also access printer basil as a remote printer provided the LP spooler on hyacinth is so configured The remote printer can be named anything for users on hyacinth but consistency in naming simplifies the configuration If you use the HP UX command line interface the complexities of setting up remote access are accomplished using the padmin 1M and rlpdaemon 1M commands In Figure 7 2 the printer basil is accessed by both primrose and hyacinth as a network printer Basil is connected directly to the LAN and has its own IP address There is no direct connection RS 232 C parallel HP IB or SCSI between the printer and any HP UX system primrose or hyacinth 7 2 Configuring Printers and Plotters basil Figure 7 2 Network Access to a Printer Configuring access to a network printer is more complex than configuring access to a local printer HP recommends using the HP JetDirect Network Interface an optional product SAM requires JetDirect configuration and hides any additional complexities When a user generates a request to a configured network printer the LP spooler on the system from which the request is generated sends

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Method of determining FET source/drain wire, contact, and diffusion  Hisp PD (13-10-00) 272069_eng  Port Designs PHOENIX UNIVERSAL  T'nB CHNBCAR01 mobile device charger  Manual de usuario  références et bibliographie  Betriebs- und Installationsanleitung NFO Sinus  NEC P463-AVT Mechanical Drawings  OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  HUE-800 manual_v1.00_8-8  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file